4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual 058607-006

4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual 058607-006
User’s
Manual
4400 Bar Code Label Printer
058607-006
Intermec Corporation
6001 36th Avenue West
P.O. Box 4280
Everett, WA 98203-9280
U.S. technical and service support: 1-800-755-5505
U.S. media supplies ordering information: 1-800-227-9947
Canadian technical and service support: 1-800-688-7043
Canadian media supplies ordering information: 1-800-268-6936
Outside U.S. and Canada:
Contact your local Intermec service supplier.
The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing
customers to operate and/or service Intermec manufactured equipment and is not to be released,
reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec.
Information and specifications in this manual are subject to change without notice.
 1996 by Intermec Corporation
All Rights Reserved
The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, JANUS, IRL, Duratherm, TRAKKER, Antares, Precision
Print, PrintSet, Virtual Wedge, and CrossBar are trademarks of Intermec Corporation.
Throughout this manual, trademarked names may be used. Rather than put a trademark ( )
symbol in every occurrence of a trademarked name, we state that we are using the names only in an
editorial fashion, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement.
SILICON SOFTWARE
 1989 Ready Systems Corp. All rights reserved. Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright
laws of the United States.
RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in
subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data & Computer Software clause at (D) FAR
252.227-7013.
READY SYSTEMS, 470 POTRERO AVE., SUNNYVALE, CA 94086
Manual Change Record
This page records the changes to this manual. The manual was originally released as version 001.
Version
Date
Description of Change
002
3/93
The manual was updated to reflect changes made to the firmware.
Information affected by the update includes the printhead resistance
test and 4406 specific references.
003
9/93
Addendum 060093-001 was added to the manual. The addendum
contains firmware version 2.2 information.
004
02/95
Addendum 061534-001 was added to the manual. The addendum
contains firmware version 2.3 information including new information
on 2D symbology and updates existing information on HIBC and UCC
128. It also contains new information on Maxicode.
005
07/96
The manual was updated to include PrintSet information. Revisions
were added to include information on setting sensitivity ratings and
downloading user-defined fonts.
006
11/96
The manual was converted to an 8.5 x 11 page size. Other minor
revisions were made.
Contents
Contents
Before You Begin xvii
Warranty Information xvii
Safety Summary xvii
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes xviii
About This Manual xviii
Other Intermec Manuals xx
1
Getting Started
Unpacking the Printer 1-3
Checking the Order for Completeness 1-3
Reporting Damage or Defects 1-5
Learning About the 4400 Printer 1-5
Printing a Configuration Test Label 1-10
Powering Up Your Printer 1-10
Opening the Printer 1-11
Loading Media 1-12
Closing the Printer 1-14
Printing the Label 1-14
Restoring Printer Default Configuration 1-15
2
Installing the Printer
About Printer Installation 2-3
Preparing for Installation 2-4
Situating the Printer 2-4
Installing the Media Roll Holder 2-4
Connecting the Printer to Your System 2-5
Connecting the 4400 to a PC 2-6
Connecting the Printer to a PC Serial Port 2-6
Connecting the Printer to a PC Parallel Port 2-8
Connecting the 4400 to a Network 2-9
Connecting the 4400 to an AS/400 2-9
v
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Connecting the 4400 to a Mainframe 2-9
RS-485 (Multi-Drop) Cables 2-11
Cabling Considerations in Noisy Electrical Environments 2-11
Configuring the Serial Port 2-12
Verifying Printer Communications With Your System 2-14
3
Using the Control Panel
About the Control Panel 3-3
Reading the Display 3-4
Understanding the Indicator Lights 3-4
Alert 3-4
Power 3-4
Online 3-5
Using the Operator Keys 3-5
[ONLINE/OFFLINE] 3-5
[OPEN] 3-6
[FEED/RELOAD] 3-6
Using the Selection Keys to Access the Menus 3-6
About the Printer Menus 3-7
Accessing the Main Menu 3-7
Moving Around Within the Circle 3-8
Tips for Using the Control Panel 3-10
4
Operating the Printer
About Printer Operation 4-3
Opening and Closing the Printer 4-3
Opening the Printer With Power On 4-3
Opening the Printer With Power Off 4-4
Closing the Printer 4-5
Opening and Closing the Printer With the Media Alert Enabled 4-6
Loading Media Into the Printer 4-7
Opening the Edge Guides 4-7
Removing the Media Roll and Shaft 4-8
vi
Contents
Installing a New Media Roll 4-8
Feeding Media Into the Printer 4-9
Adjusting the Edge Guides 4-11
Changing Thermal Transfer Ribbon 4-12
Removing the Ribbon Access Door 4-12
Loading the Thermal Transfer Ribbon 4-13
Replacing the Ribbon Access Door 4-15
Setting the Media Sensitivity Number 4-16
Setting the Media Sensitivity Number for Thermal Transfer Media 4-17
Setting the Media Sensitivity Number for Other Media and Ribbons 4-17
Setting the Dark Adjust 4-20
Using the X and Y Forms Adjust 4-21
Adjusting the Label Rest Point 4-23
Printing the Buffer Contents 4-24
About Error Messages 4-24
5
Configuring the Printer
About Printer Configuration 5-3
Changing the Basic Configuration Settings 5-3
Changing the Label Configuration Settings 5-6
About the Printhead Test 5-8
Printhead Pressure 5-8
Adjusting the Printhead Test 5-9
The Printhead Range Percentage 5-9
Adjusting the Printhead Range 5-10
Optimizing the Print Speed and Image Bands 5-11
About the Image Bands Command 5-11
Optimizing Image Bands for Print Speed 5-11
Optimizing Image Bands for Batch Printing 5-12
Configuring the Label Width 5-12
Setting the Media Alert 5-14
vii
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
About Configuration Test Labels 5-16
User-Defined 5-16
Hardware 5-16
Printing a Configuration Test Label 5-17
Restoring Printer Default Configuration 5-19
Memory Reset 5-19
Factory Default Settings 5-20
Replacing an 8636/46 Printer With a 4400 Printer 5-21
About the Emulation Settings 5-21
Printing in Emulation Mode 5-22
6
Designing Labels and Using Commands
Introduction to Label Design 6-3
Label Formats 6-3
Communicating With the Printer 6-4
Using the PrintSet Software 6-5
Using the Printer Command Set 6-5
Downloading Commands Using DOS 6-5
Downloading Commands Using Readable Protocol/Command Characters 6-6
Downloading Commands Using PC Communications Programs or Host
Terminals 6-7
Using ASCII Control Characters 6-8
Switching Between Print Mode and Program Mode 6-8
Understanding Label Design Components 6-9
Bar Code Fields 6-10
Character Fields and Fonts 6-10
User-Defined Fonts 6-12
Downloading User-Defined Fonts 6-13
Downloading Bitmap Fonts 6-13
Lines and Boxes 6-13
Graphics 6-14
One Bit Per Byte 6-14
Six Bits Per Byte 6-16
Working With Fields 6-18
Editing Fields 6-18
Deleting Fields 6-19
viii
Contents
Scaling Fields 6-19
Magnifying Fonts and Character Fields 6-19
Magnifying Bar Code Fields 6-20
Positioning Fields 6-20
Rotating Fields 6-21
Storing Label Formats 6-22
Designing Pages 6-22
Using Printer Memory 6-23
Format Examples 6-23
Example 1 6-24
Example 2 6-27
7
Printer Commands
Command Set Summary 7-3
Summary of Print Mode Commands 7-4
Summary of Configuration Commands 7-6
Summary of Program Mode Commands 7-8
Summary of Test and Service Mode Commands 7-11
Using Printer Commands According to Function 7-12
Programming 7-12
Editing Pages 7-12
Editing Formats 7-12
Editing Bar Code Fields 7-13
Editing Human-Readable Fields 7-13
Editing Interpretive Fields 7-13
Editing Line Fields 7-14
Editing UDC Fields 7-14
Editing Box Fields 7-14
Editing UDCs 7-14
Editing Bitmap UDFs 7-15
Editing Outline UDFs 7-15
System 7-15
Printing 7-16
Configuring 7-17
Transmitting 7-18
Protocol Modification 7-18
Test and Service 7-19
Cutter 7-19
Self-Strip 7-19
Automatic Printhead Resistance Test 7-19
ix
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Print Mode Commands 7-20
4400 Mode, Select 7-20
86XX Emulation Mode, Enter 7-21
Abort Print Job 7-21
Alphanumeric Field Separator 7-21
Batch Count, Set 7-22
Clear All Data 7-22
Clear Data From Current Field 7-22
Command Terminator 1 7-22
Command Terminator 2 7-22
Configuration Parameters, Transmit 7-23
Cut 7-23
Data Shift - International Characters 7-23
Error Code, Transmit 7-23
Field Decrement, Set 7-24
Field Increment, Set 7-24
Field, Select 7-24
First Data Entry Field, Select 7-25
Font, Transmit 7-25
Form Feed 7-25
Format, Select 7-26
Format, Transmit 7-26
Increment and Decrement, Disable 7-26
Label and Gap Length, Transmit 7-27
Next Data Entry Field, Select 7-27
Numeric Field Separator 7-27
Options Selected, Transmit 7-27
Page, Select 7-28
Page, Transmit 7-28
Print 7-28
Printhead Parameters, Transmit 7-28
Program Mode, Enter 7-29
Program Number, Transmit 7-29
Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit 7-29
Quantity Count, Set 7-29
Reset 7-29
Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print 7-30
Static RAM Usage, Transmit 7-30
Status Dump 7-30
Status Enquiry 7-31
Test and Service Mode, Enter 7-31
User-Defined Characters, Transmit 7-31
User-Defined Tables, Transmit 7-32
Warm Boot 7-32
x
Contents
Configuration Commands 7-33
86XX or 4400 Mode on Power Up 7-33
Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable 7-34
Auto-Transmit 1, Enable 7-34
Auto-Transmit 2, Enable 7-34
Auto-Transmit 3, Enable 7-35
Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable 7-35
Control Panel Access Permission, Set 7-35
Cutter, Enable or Disable 7-35
Dark Adjust, Set 7-36
End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set 7-36
IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable 7-37
Intercharacter Delay, Set 7-37
Label Rest Point, Adjust 7-37
Label Retract, Enable or Disable 7-38
Label Retract Distance, Set 7-38
Label Stock Type, Select 7-38
Label Width, Set 7-39
Maximum Label Length, Set 7-39
Message Delay, Set 7-39
Modified Field Reimaging 7-40
Selecting a Format for Field Reimaging 7-40
Number of Image Bands, Set 7-41
Online or Offline on Power Up 7-41
Postamble, Set 7-41
Preamble, Set 7-41
Print Speed, Set 7-42
Printer Language, Select 7-42
Printhead Pressure, Set 7-43
Printhead Test Parameters, Set 7-43
Self-Strip, Enable or Disable 7-44
Top of Form, Set 7-44
TTR or Direct Thermal, Select 7-44
Program Mode Commands 7-45
Bar Code, Select Type 7-45
Bar Code Field, Create or Edit 7-46
Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define 7-46
Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define 7-47
Box Field, Create or Edit 7-47
Box or Line Field, Define Length 7-48
Character Origin Offset, Define 7-48
Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define 7-48
Code 39 Prefix Character, Define 7-49
Delete Field 7-49
xi
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Edit Session, Save Current 7-49
Erase Format 7-49
Field Data, Define Source 7-50
Field Direction, Define 7-50
Field Origin, Define 7-51
Font, Select Type 7-51
Font Character Width, Define 7-51
Format, Create or Edit 7-52
Format, Create or Edit 7-52
Format Data in a Page, Define Source 7-52
Format Direction in a Page, Define 7-53
Format Offset With a Page, Define 7-53
Format Position in a Page, Assign 7-53
Format Position From Page, Delete 7-54
Graphic or UDC, Define 7-54
Graphic, Select Type 7-54
Height Magnification, Define 7-54
Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit 7-55
Human-Readable Text, Define Border Around 7-55
Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define 7-56
Interpretive Field, Edit 7-56
Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable 7-56
Line Field, Create or Edit 7-57
Line or Box Field, Define Length 7-57
Load Command Tables 7-57
Outline Font Description, Download 7-58
Outline User-Defined Font, Clear or Create 7-58
Page, Create or Edit 7-58
Page, Delete 7-59
Pitch Size, Set 7-59
Point Size, Set 7-59
Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set 7-59
Program Mode, Exit 7-60
Reset 7-60
Transmit Error Code 7-60
User-Defined Character, Clear or Create 7-60
User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit 7-61
User-Defined Font, Clear or Define Bitmap 7-61
User-Defined Font Character, Create 7-61
Width of Line, Box, Bar or Character, Define 7-62
Command Tables 7-63
Print Mode Commands (t=0) 7-63
Escape Print Commands (t=1) 7-64
Shift Print Commands (t=2) 7-65
xii
Contents
Status Responses and Auto-Transmit Commands (t=3) 7-66
Protocol Commands (t=4) 7-67
Communication Protocol Characters 7-68
Fonts 7-69
Bar Codes 7-70
More About Printing 2D Symbologies 7-76
More About PDF 417 7-77
Using m1 to Select Number of Columns 7-77
Using m2 to Select an Error Correction Level 7-77
Using m3 to Set the Truncate Flag 7-77
More About Code One 7-77
Using m1 to Select a Code One Version 7-78
More About Maxicode 7-78
Test and Service Mode Command Descriptions 7-79
Printer Functional Boundaries 7-80
8
Special Procedures
About Security Levels 8-3
Security Level Descriptions 8-3
Setting a Security Level 8-3
Bypassing Security Levels 8-4
Cloning 8-4
Connecting the Printers for Cloning 8-5
Preparing the Receiver Printer 8-5
Preparing the Sender Printer 8-6
Downloading Sender RAM to the Receiver 8-7
Using Selective Transfer 8-8
Connecting the Printers for Selective Transfer 8-8
Preparing the Receiver Printer 8-9
Preparing the Sender Printer 8-9
Sending Formats, Fonts, Pages, and Graphics to the Receiver Printer 8-10
Sending Fonts, Pages, Formats, and Graphics 8-10
Sending Only Fonts, Pages, Formats, or Graphics 8-11
Downloading All Versions 8-11
Downloading Specified Versions 8-11
Setting Maximum Print Speed 8-12
xiii
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Installing Options 8-13
Options Software Drivers 8-14
Loading Options 8-14
9
Troubleshooting
About Troubleshooting 9-3
Printer Operation Problems 9-4
Print Quality Problems 9-5
Communication Problems 9-6
Error Messages 9-6
Error Codes 9-13
Using the Print Tests 9-14
Printing a Copy of the Data From the Host 9-15
Calibrating Label Sensors 9-16
Increasing Available Memory 9-17
Print Quality 9-18
Media Selection 9-18
Sensitivity 9-18
Print Speed 9-19
Formats 9-19
Printhead Pressure 9-19
Dark Adjust 9-19
Printhead Adjustment Lever 9-20
Printhead Aging 9-21
10
Routine Maintenance
About Printer Maintenance 10-3
Inspecting the Printer 10-3
Components to Maintain 10-3
xiv
Contents
Cleaning the Printer 10-4
Removing the Ribbon Access Door 10-5
Opening the Printer 10-5
Cleaning the Printer Case 10-6
Cleaning the Printhead 10-6
Cleaning the Platen Roller and Tear Bar 10-7
Cleaning the Label Gap and Label Mark Sensors 10-9
Cleaning the Paper Path 10-9
Cleaning the Edge Guides 10-10
Replacing the Fuse 10-11
A
Appendix
4400 Printer Specifications A-3
Dimensions (no options installed) A-3
Electrical Requirements A-3
Power Usage A-3
Printing Method A-3
Printing Speed A-3
Printhead A-4
Media Specifications A-4
Ribbon Specifications A-4
Environment A-4
Communications A-5
Fonts and Graphics A-5
Character Sets A-5
Bar Code Symbologies A-6
Code 39 A-6
Code 93 A-6
Code 2 of 5 A-6
Interleaved 2 of 5 A-6
Codabar A-6
Code 11 A-7
Code 128 A-7
UPC A-7
EAN A-7
POSTNET A-8
2D Symbologies A-9
2D Stacked Symbologies A-9
Code 16K A-9
xv
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Code 49 A-9
PDF 417 A-10
2D Matrix Symbologies A-10
Code One A-10
Maxicode A-11
Printer Options A-11
Self Strip A-11
Cutter and Tray A-11
Narrow Media Accessory Kit A-11
Memory Expansion A-12
Twinax Interface A-12
Coax Interface A-12
Centronics Parallel Interface A-12
International Character Sets A-13
4400 Character Table A-13
8636/46 Character Table A-14
Translation Character Table A-15
Extended Character Sets A-16
ASCII Conversion Chart A-22
G
I
xvi
Glossary
Index
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
This section introduces you to standard warranty provisions, safety
precautions, warnings and cautions, document formatting conventions, and
sources of additional product information.
Warranty Information
To receive a copy of the standard warranty provision for this product, contact
your local Intermec support services organization. In the U.S. call
1-800-755-5505, and in Canada call 1-800-688-7043. Otherwise, refer to the
Worldwide Sales & Service list that ships with this manual for the address and
telephone number of your Intermec sales organization.
Safety Summary
Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions
in this book before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be
seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not
follow the safety warnings and cautions.
Do not repair or adjust alone Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone
under any circumstances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always
be present for your safety.
First aid Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an
injury. Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems.
Resuscitation Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops
breathing. Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage,
you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods.
Energized equipment Never work on energized equipment unless authorized
by a responsible authority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous.
Electrical shock from energized equipment can cause death. If you must
perform authorized emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that you
comply strictly with approved safety regulations.
xvii
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
The warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual use the following format.
WARNING
Warning
A warning warns you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or
statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to
the persons working on the equipment.
Avertissement
Un avertissement vous alerte d’une procédure de fonctionnement, d’une
méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit être strictement respecté pour
éviter l’occurrence de mort ou de blessures graves aux personnes manupulant
l’équipement.
CAUTION
Caution
A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or
statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or
destruction, or corruption or loss of data.
Conseil
Une précaution vous avertit d’une procédure de fonctionnement, d’une
méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit être strictement respecté pour
empêcher l’endommagement ou la destruction de l’équipement, ou l’altération
ou la perte de données.
Note: Notes are statements that either provide extra information about a topic or
contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances.
About This Manual
This manual serves as a complete user’s guide for the installation and
operation of the 4400 printer. All instructions for testing and configuring the
printer are included as well as descriptions of options and advanced features.
This manual should be used by all printer users as a guide for installation,
operation, and troubleshooting. Users generally include the following:
xviii
•
Printer operators who use the printer daily.
•
Technicians who install, test, and maintain the printer.
•
Systems analysts who integrate the printer into a data collection system.
•
Programmers who design bar code labels and configure the printer to a
specific application.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Before You Begin
To reduce the risk of printing errors, the buyer is advised to frequently check
the accuracy of printed bar code and alphanumeric information. In those
situations where accuracy is imperative, the buyer is advised to confirm the
accuracy of all printed labels with the information originally intended to be
encoded on the label. Persons operating the printer should maintain it in
accordance with the procedures in this manual to keep it in good working
condition.
Terms and Conventions
The following special terms and conventions occur throughout the manual.
Refer to the glossary for a complete list of terms.
Terms
“Printer” or “4400” refer to the Intermec 4400 Bar Code Label Printer.
“Media” is the label stock on which the printer prints labels.
“Host” refers to a personal computer or other computer that communicates
with the printer.
Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this manual for operating
procedures and descriptions of the printer.
•
Feed/Reload refers to the Feed/Reload button on the printer control panel.
•
Downloaded commands appear in the order that you enter them into the
printer with the following conventions:
Convention
Description
<>
Angle brackets < > enclose mnemonic representations of ASCII
control characters. For example, <ETX> represents the ASCII “End of
Text” character.
data
Italic text represents variable data, which you must replace with a
real value. For example, n signifies a variable for which you must
designate a constant value.
[data]
Ctrl
Ctrl-Z
[ENTER]
E3;F3
Italic text within brackets represents optional data.
Bold text represents a key on your keypad. For example, Ctrl
represents the Ctrl key.
When two keys are joined with a dash, press them simultaneously.
For example, if you see the command Ctrl-Z, press the two keys at
the same time.
Bold text enclosed in brackets represents a control panel key to press.
Type all characters that appear in the Courier font by pressing an
individual key on the keypad.
xix
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Other Intermec Manuals
You may need additional information for working with the 4400 printer in a
data collection system. To order additional manuals, contact your local
Intermec representative or distributor.
Manual
Intermec Part No.
9154 Multi-Drop Line Controller System Manual
048517
9161B Installation Manual
049572
RF System/9180 Controller User’s Manual
054292
RF System/9181 Controller User’s Manual
056543
Data Communications Reference Manual
044737
The Bar Code Book by Roger C. Palmer
xx
1
Getting Started
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Getting Started
1
This chapter contains a brief introduction to the components of your printer and
provides procedures for loading media and printing a configuration test label that
shows the printer’s current configuration.
If you have followed the procedures in the Getting Started Guide for printing a
configuration test label, then you can proceed with installation, which is described in
Chapter 2.
Unpacking the Printer
1. Unpack the printer and put it on a clean stable surface for testing.
2. Store the shipping container and materials in case you need to ship the
printer for any reason.
3. Check the order for completeness.
4. Report any damage or defects.
Checking the Order for Completeness
Verify the contents of the shipping container against the list below. Use the
figure on the following page to help identify these items.
•
4400 bar code label printer
•
AC power cord
•
Media roll holder
•
Media Envelope
•
4400 Bar Code Label Printer Getting Started Guide
Verify your order against the packing slip to ensure that your order is
complete. If any parts are missing, please contact your local Intermec
representative.
1-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Contents of 4400 Shipping Container
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
ME
EN
ER
NU
TE
T
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WER
NT
INUE
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LINE
ON
LI
OFF NE
LINE
E
M
E
P
LO
E
V
IA
N
D
E
g
in
tt ed
Ge tart ide
S Gu
Free
Softwa
Printe
re Ins
r Install
ide
Tool !
ode
ar C
0B
440
inte
l Pr
e
Lab
r
/N
P
05
24
43
4400U.010
1-4
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Getting Started
1
Reporting Damage or Defects
Your printer was thoroughly tested and inspected before it was shipped from
the factory. If any items are damaged you can take the following steps to
correct the problem.
•
Take photographs if necessary.
•
Contact the transport carrier.
Note: The customer is responsible for all damage claims against the carrier. See the
“Intermec Terms of Sale” printed on your sales invoice.
Learning About the 4400 Printer
The Intermec 4400 printer is a thermal and thermal transfer bar code printer
designed to print high quality labels in an industrial environment. These labels
can contain data in both text and bar code form as well as graphics, lines, and
boxes in a variety of sizes and orientations. The flexibility and advanced design
of the hardware and software that comprise the printer make it possible to
create and print labels quickly and efficiently for many applications.
You can use the printer for all your labeling applications since it prints many
different bar codes, lines, and graphics in user-defined fields.
1-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
The following figures and tables can help familiarize you with the front view
and back view of your printer.
Front View Part Descriptions
Number
Name
Description
1
Control Panel
Lets you operate the printer directly.
2
Thermal Transfer Ribbon Takeup
Hub
Collects used thermal transfer ribbon.
3
Thermal Transfer Ribbon Supply
Hub
Holds the supply of unused thermal transfer ribbon.
4
Printer Cover
Covers the paper path and house the thermal transfer
ribbon.
5
Media Roll Holder
Holds media rolls up to 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter. Can
be removed if fanfold media is used.
6
Ribbon Access Door
Provides access to the thermal transfer ribbon and the
cover’s manual release latch. An interlock prevents printer
operation if the door is open.
7
Cooling Fan
Runs while the printer is on to prevent overheating.
8
Edge Guides (Adjustable)
Keeps media aligned as it moves through the printer.
9
Manual Release
Lets you manually open the printer when it is turned off.
10
Tear Bar*
Used for tearing off labels.
11
Platen Roller
Advances media through the printer.
12
External Option
Communications Port
Provides communications with external options such as the
Self-Strip or Cutter.
13
Label Mark Sensor
(Photoelectric)
Scans media for indexing marks that indicate a new label.
14
Label Gap Sensor (Photoelectric)
Scans media for label gaps that indicate a new label.
15
Printhead
Prints label formats on the 4.46 inches of media that pass
underneath.
* For optimal print quality on tag stock, the tear bar may need to be removed.
1-6
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
1
Getting Started
Front View of the 4400 Printer
3
2
4
1
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
ALE
ME
EN
NU
TE
RT
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WE
NTI
R
NU
E
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LIN
OF
FL E
INE
15
14
13
5
6
12
7
11
8
10
9
4400-07B
1-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Rear View Part Descriptions
Number
Name
Description
1
Optional I/O Port
Enables the printer to communicate with a host through an
optional interface in addition to the standard serial
interface. Optional boards are not shown installed.
2
Serial Communications Port
Connector
Connects the printer to a host computer with a 25-pin “D”
style subminiature receptacle. This connector supports
communications over RS-232, RS-422, and RS-485 serial
ports.
3
AC Power Receptacle
The AC power cord plugs into this receptacle. The printer
can operate at 100 to 240 VAC at frequencies of 50 to 60 Hz.
4
Fuse
The 4400 printer uses a 3AG, Slo-Blo, 5A, 250V fuse. See
Chapter 10 for replacement procedures.
5
Power (On/Off) Switch
To switch the printer on, press the line ( l ) on the switch. To
switch the printer off, press the circle (O).
1-8
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
1
Getting Started
Rear View of the 4400 Printer
1
2
3
4
5
4400-08
1-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Printing a Configuration Test Label
Before you install your printer and connect it to your data collection system,
you should print a configuration test label. This label provides you with a copy
of the current configuration settings. You will need to know these settings
when you install your printer and incorporate it into your system.
Note: These instructions for printing a configuration test label are identical to those in
the Getting Started Guide. If you have already followed the procedures in the Getting
Started Guide, you can skip to the next chapter.
To print a configuration test label, follow these steps that are described in the
next sections:
1. Power up the printer.
2. Open the printer.
3. Load media.
4. Close the printer.
5. Print the label.
Powering Up Your Printer
1. Plug the AC power cord into the receptacle on the back of the printer. Plug
the other end into a wall outlet or surge protector.
2. Set the power switch (located on the back panel of the printer) to the on ( l )
position. When the printer is fully powered, the Power and Online
indicator lights are lit and the display reads as follows:
PAPER FAULT
Note: All three indicator lights, including the Alert light, flash when you turn on
the printer.
1-10
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Getting Started
1
4400-35
Opening the Printer
1. Press [ONLINE/OFFLINE]. The display reads:
OFFLINE
READY
2. Press [OPEN]. Lift the cover open to expose the paper path. The display
reads:
PAPER PATH OPEN
1-11
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Opening the Printer
OPEN
0P
EN
Loading Media
Use the direct thermal media supplied in the Media Envelope to learn how to
load media.
Note: If you want to load thermal transfer ribbon and use your own media, refer to
“Loading the Thermal Transfer Ribbon” in Chapter 4.
To load media
1. Remove the media from the Media Envelope. Lay it out flat, with the labels
facing up.
2. Open the edge guides to accommodate the width of the media. Slide the
edge guides apart by pulling on the edge guide tab.
1-12
Co d e 39
HelvC NugFont
Getting Started
1
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
MEN
EN
ER
U
TE
T
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WE
NT
INUE
R
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-32
3. Feed one end of the media into the opening at the back of the printer.
Continue feeding media until several inches extend out the front of the
printer.
4400-31
4. Adjust the edge guides so that the media does not shift as the label is
printed. To do this, push the edge guide tab in until the inside edges of the
guide just contact the edges of the media.
1-13
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Closing the Printer
1. Close the printer by pressing down on the cover until it latches. The display
shows the following:
PRESS RELOAD
2. Press [FEED/RELOAD]. Media advances to the next label and the display
shows the following:
OFFLINE
READY
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
MEN
EN
ER
U
TE
T
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WE
NT
INUE
R
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-34
Printing the Label
1. From the OFFLINE READY display, press [MENU]. The display shows:
OFFLINE
OPERATOR MENU
2. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
SERVICE MENU
3. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
SERVICE MENU
PRINT PAGE
1-14
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Getting Started
1
4. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
SERVICE MENU
PRINT CONFIG
5. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
PRINT CONFIG
USER DEFINED
6. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
USER DEFINED
EXECUTE TEST
7. Press [ENTER] to print the configuration test label. A sample label is shown
in Chapter 5 under “About Configuration Test Labels.”
8. To exit from the Service Menu, press [CONTINUE]. The display shows:
OFFLINE
OFFLINE READY
9. Turn off the printer. Save the configuration test label for reference when
you install and configure the printer.
If you have trouble printing your configuration test label, try restoring the
default configuration using the procedure in the next section.
Restoring Printer Default Configuration
If your configuration test label is not satisfactory, or if you have trouble
printing, your printer may have lost its configuration during shipment.
To restore the factory default setting
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display (press [ONLINE/OFFLINE] if
necessary).
2. Press [MENU]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
SERVICE MENU
3. Press [SELECT]. Then press [↑] until the display shows:
SERVICE MENU
MEMORY RESET
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
MEMORY RESET
ALL
1-15
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
5. Press [↓] until the display shows:
MEMORY RESET
CONFIGURATION
6. Press [ENTER] to restore the default configuration settings.
7. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the OFFLINE READY display.
Now follow the procedure under “Printing the Label” earlier in this chapter.
ATTENTION
After using Memory Reset you must reinstall the software drivers for options,
such as Cutter or Self-Strip. Memory Reset also resets all parameters to their
default settings, as listed in Chapter 5. Sensitivity will be set at 420. See
Chapter 4 for procedures on resetting parameters to non-default settings and
Chapter 8 for procedures on reinstalling the options’ software drivers.
1-16
2
Installing the Printer
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Installing the Printer
2
You can connect the 4400 printer to almost any system available and establish
communications. Use this chapter for:
•
preparing for installation.
•
connecting the printer to your system.
•
configuring the serial port.
•
verifying printer communications with your system.
About Printer Installation
The Intermec 4400 printer is designed to operate in a wide range of
environments and you can configure it to meet the printing requirements of
almost any data collection system. You can connect it directly to a host
computer or integrate it into a large data collection network through a port
concentrator or controller. The printer can run in either point-to-point or MultiDrop network configurations. It can also run from a remote location through a
dedicated modem.
The printer’s default communications parameters are suitable for most serial
point-to-point installations but can easily be changed if they do not meet the
requirements for your system.
To install the printer, you may want to perform some or all of the following
procedures:
•
Assemble and set up the printer
•
Determine the appropriate configuration
•
Connect the printer to the host computer
•
Configure the main port
•
Set security levels
2-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Preparing for Installation
Before you connect the printer to your system, make sure that you have chosen
a proper physical location for the printer and that you have installed the media
roll holder. Also, print a configuration test label by following the instructions in
Chapter 1 or in the 4400 Bar Code Label Printer Getting Started Guide.
Situating the Printer
When choosing a physical location for the printer, use the following guidelines:
•
Choose a location within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of an electrical source.
•
Set the printer up on a level, sturdy surface.
•
Allow easy access to the power switch and the rear panel.
•
Make sure the grill covering the fan is kept clear of obstructions and debris.
•
Keep water and other liquids away from the printer.
Installing the Media Roll Holder
The 4400 printer accepts both fanfold and roll media. If you are planning to
use roll media, install the Media Roll Holder as shown below.
If you are using fanfold media, skip this procedure.
To install the media roll holder
1. Open the printer and lift the cover.
2. Insert the tabs at the ends of the arms into the slots at the back of the
printer as shown in the figure below. Make sure the holder is installed
securely before loading roll media. Refer to the following illustration.
2-4
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Installing the Printer
2
4400-25B
Connecting the Printer to Your System
The proper method for connecting your printer to the host computer is
determined by the way your system is configured. This section contains
procedures for point-to-point and non-switched modem installations. There is
also a reference section for network installations.
You can connect your 4400 printer to a PC, a local area network, an AS/400 (or
other midrange), or a mainframe. This section provides the information
necessary for connecting to any of these systems.
The following illustration shows you where to connect your system to the
printer. You can use either of these two ports on the rear of the printer:
•
Serial communications port
•
Optional I/O board port (if you have an adapter card installed)
2-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Connecting the Printer
Optional
I/O port
Serial
communication
port
connector
4400U.011
Connecting the 4400 to a PC
You can connect the 4400 to either a serial port or parallel port (if you have the
option installed) on your PC. You must provide the correct cables for
connecting the printer. Refer to the following instructions for cable information.
Contact your Intermec representative for ordering assistance if you do not have
the appropriate cables.
Connecting the Printer to a PC Serial Port
To connect the 4400 to your PC serial port, you need a shielded EIA RS-232, RS422, or RS-485 electrical interface with a 25-pin D-style subminiature connector.
It must have pins on the printer end and an appropriate serial port connector
on the other end.
Use the following table to determine the correct Intermec cable for your
application. Cable schematics for these cables appear on the next page.
2-6
For Connecting To
Use Intermec Cable Part Number
IBM PC AT
048693 (25-pin printer to 9-pin serial port straight-through)
IBM PC XT
048668 (25-pin printer to 25-pin serial port null modem)
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
2
Installing the Printer
To connect your printer to a PC serial port
1. Turn the On/Off switch to the off position.
2. Plug the 25-pin connector into the serial communications port on the back
of the 4400 printer.
3. Plug the other end of the cable into a serial COM port on the PC.
4. If necessary, change the PC serial port configuration to match your printer.
The default configuration settings for the 4400 printer are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
9600 baud
even parity
7 bit word length
XON/XOFF no status response protocol
device address A
direct thermal media
See “Configuring the Serial Port” later in this chapter for more information.
RS-232 Null Modem Cable for AT (Part Number 048693)
SHIELD
9-PIN (SOCKET) D-SUB
METAL BACKSHELL
25-PIN (PLUG) D-SUB
METAL BACKSHELL
1
CHASSIS GROUND
RECEIVED DATA
2
2
TRANSMITTED DATA
TRANSMITTED DATA
3
3
RECEIVED DATA
CLEAR TO SEND
8
8
CARRIER DETECT
DATA SET READY
REQUEST TO SEND
7
DATA TERMINAL READY
4
6
DATA SET READY
6
20 DATA TERMINAL READY
CARRIER DETECT
1
5
CLEAR TO SEND
4
REQUEST TO SEND
5
7
GROUND
AT
PRINTER
GROUND
NOTE: The metal backshell is connected directly
to the shield to achieve electrostatic discharge
(ESD) immunity.
4400-19B
2-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
RS-232 Null Modem Cable for PC (Part Number 048668)
SHIELD
25-PIN (SOCKET) D-SUB
METAL BACKSHELL
25-PIN (PLUG) D-SUB
METAL BACKSHELL
CHASSIS GROUND
1
1
CHASSIS GROUND
TRANSMITTED DATA
2
3
RECEIVED DATA
RECEIVED DATA
3
2
TRANSMITTED DATA
REQUEST TO SEND
4
CARRIER DETECT
CLEAR TO SEND
5
8
DATA SET READY
6
20 DATA TERMINAL READY
GROUND
7
7
GROUND
DATA TERMINAL READY 20
6
DATA SET READY
CARRIER DETECT
8
4
5
PC
CLEAR TO SEND
PRINTER
NOTE: The metal backshell is connected directly
to the shield to achieve electrostatic discharge
(ESD) immunity.
3240G.022
Connecting the Printer to a PC Parallel Port
If you are using a parallel port to communicate with the printer, you need:
•
a Centronics interface adapter installed in the printer.
•
a parallel cable to run between the printer and the PC.
If you did not have the parallel interface installed at the factory, you can install
the field installable option (Part No. 056830) in the optional I/O board port of
your printer. You can purchase a parallel cable from Intermec (Part No. 051211)
or from your local computer store.
To connect your printer to a PC parallel port
1. Turn the On/Off switch to the off position.
2. Plug the Centronics cable connector into the interface adapter port on the
back of the 4400 printer.
3. Plug the other end of the cable into a parallel port on the PC.
2-8
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Installing the Printer
2
Connecting the 4400 to a Network
You can connect the 4400 printer to Novell NetWare networks, Token Ring
networks, or TCP/IP networks. To connect the 4400 printer to a network, you
must have:
•
a Centronics parallel interface installed in your printer.
•
a network interface adapter (for example, Ethernet).
If you did not have the interface installed at the factory, you can install the field
installable option (Part No. 056830) in the optional I/O board port of your
printer.
The network interface adapter (for example, Ethernet) connects to the
Centronics parallel interface on the back of the printer. Your network must be
able to use XON/XOFF (hardware handshake) protocol. Refer to your network
documentation for more information.
Connecting the 4400 to an AS/400
To connect a 4400 printer directly to an AS/400 or midrange system, you need:
•
a twinax adapter card.
•
a twinaxial cable (equivalent to IBM Part No. 7362267 or 7362062).
The maximum cable length for the twinax interface is 5000 feet (1525
meters).
If you did not have the twinax card installed at the factory, you can install the
field installable option (Part No. 056835) in the optional I/O board port of your
printer.
For help on cabling and communications, see the manual that comes with the
twinax adapter card.
Note: If you are using a midrange computer other than the AS/400, refer to your
system documentation for information on cabling and setting up communications.
Connecting the 4400 to a Mainframe
To connect a 4400 printer directly to an IBM mainframe, you need:
•
a coax adapter card.
•
a coaxial cable (equivalent to IBM Part No. 2577672 or 1833108).
The maximum cable length allowed is 4920 feet (1500 meters). See the IBM
specification Installation and Assembly of Coaxial Cable and Accessories, part
number GA27-2805-4, for further information.
2-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
If you did not have the coax card installed at the factory, you can install the
field installable option (Part No. 056836) in the optional I/O board port of your
printer.
For help on cabling and communications, see the manual that comes with your
coax adapter card.
RS-422 Intermec Pin Assignments
SHIELD
1
Input RxDA 16
Output TxDA 14
Output TxDB 19
+
-
➤
➤
Input RxDB 13
1
-
➤
➤
+
NOTE: Connect pin 1 to shield
at one end only.
19
14
16
13
PRINTER
HOST
4400-17B
Note: The host in this case includes Intermec products that support RS-422. NonIntermec controllers may have different pin assignments.
Straight Through DTE to DCE Cable for Use With a Modem
SHIELD
25-PIN (PLUG) D-SUB
METAL BACKSHELL
25-PIN (PLUG) D-SUB
METAL BACKSHELL
CHASSIS GROUND
1
TRANSMITTED DATA
2
RECEIVED DATA
3
REQUEST TO SEND
4
CLEAR TO SEND
5
DATA TERMINAL READY
20
1
➤
➤
➤
➤
➤
CHASSIS GROUND
2
TRANSMITTED DATA
3
RECEIVED DATA
4
REQUEST TO SEND
5
CLEAR TO SEND
20 DATA TERMINAL READY
SIGNAL GROUND
7
7
PRINTER
MODEM
SIGNAL GROUND
NOTE: The metal backshell is connected directly
to the shield to achieve electrostatic discharge
(ESD) immunity.
4400-22B
2-10
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Installing the Printer
2
RS-485 (Multi-Drop) Cables
Refer to the following manuals for information on Multi-Drop cabling and
connections.
•
9154 Multi-Drop Line Controller System Manual (Part No. 048517)
•
9161B Installation Manual (Part No. 049572)
Cabling Considerations in Noisy Electrical Environments
The items listed below create noisy electrical environments that can disrupt
data communications between your host computer and the printer:
•
Large power transformers
•
Large electric motors
•
Arc welders
•
Motor controllers
•
Switch gears
Following are several suggestions for reducing the effects of electrical noise if
any of the items listed above are located near the printer. Some
experimentation may be required to eliminate the problems. If you need help,
ask your Intermec representative for assistance.
•
Always use shielded cable. Connect the cable shield to the metal backshells
on the cable connectors and fasten the connectors to the serial ports using
screws.
•
Install ferrite cable clamps.
•
Connect the printer chassis ground to the building ground. The chassis
ground is located on the ground pin of the printer power cord.
2-11
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Configuring the Serial Port
The printer’s main port settings should match those of your host computer or
controlling device. If the default settings are not satisfactory for your needs,
follow the instructions below to change them.
The choices for the main port settings are summarized below. The default
values are shown in bold.
Command
Settings
Description
Baud Rate
110, 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600,
19200
The rate (in bits per second) at which
the host exchanges data with the
printer.
Data Bits
7 or 8
The number of bits that represent the
ASCII characters.
Message Length
255, 512
Determines the maximum number of
characters in a block (including
overhead) that is sent to the printer in
Standard, Polling Mode D and MultiDrop protocols.
Parity
Odd, Even, Mark,
Space, Off
Checks each transmitted character for
errors.
Stop Bits
1 or 2
Bits that follow each character to
synchronize character transmission.
Protocol
Standard,
XON/XOFF*,
The type of network used to connect
the printer, Multi-Drop, Polling Mode
D host and the rest of the data
collection system.
Device Address
A to Z, or 0 to 5
Unique address for each device
connected with Multi-Drop protocol.
*Use for READY/BUSY buffer control.
2-12
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Installing the Printer
2
To change the main port settings, you must use the control panel to reach the
selections in the main port menu.
To change any of the values listed in the previous table
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display.
2. Press [MENU]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows the following:
OFFLINE
INSTALL MENU
3. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
INSTALL MENU
SECURITY
4. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows the following:
INSTALL MENU
MAIN PORT
5. Press [SELECT]. The display shows the following:
MAIN PORT
BAUD RATE
6. Press [↑] or [↓] to scroll through the available commands.
7. Press [SELECT] when you reach the command you want to change. The
display shows the current setting with an asterisk (*).
8. Press [↑] or [↓] to scroll through the available settings for the command.
9. When you see the setting you want, press [ENTER]. The asterisk (*)
appears next to the new setting, indicating it is now active.
10. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the OFFLINE READY display or, to change
other settings, press [MENU] and repeat Steps 6 through 9.
Note: You must cycle the printer power (turn the printer off and then on again) to put
any changes into effect. Cycling the power after making a number of changes activates
all of them at once.
2-13
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Verifying Printer Communications With Your System
Once you have the printer connected to your system, you need to verify that
the printer communicates with your system.
This feature is available through the Data Line Print command in the Service
menu. You have two selections for Data Line Print:
Enabled The printer prints all ASCII characters it receives from the host,
including control characters. The corresponding hexadecimal code is printed
underneath each character.
Disabled
The printer prints normally. This is the default setting.
To enable or disable Data Line Print
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display.
2. Press [MENU] to enter the main menu. Press [↑] or [↓] until you reach the
Service menu.
3. Press [SELECT] to enter the Service menu. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display
shows:
SERVICE MENU
DATA LINE PRINT
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
DATA LINE PRINT
DISABLED*
5. Press [↑] or [↓] to change to Enabled, and then press [ENTER] to move the
asterisk next to the new selection. The display shows:
DATA LINE PRINT
ENABLED*
The printer will now print characters received from the host.
The data line print automatically returns to DISABLED after you exit this
menu. Press [ONLINE/OFFLINE] to return to normal printing.
Note: An example using DOS to verify printer communications follows this
procedure.
2-14
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Installing the Printer
2
Example of Using DOS to Verify Printer Communications
1. At the DOS prompt, type the following command and press Enter to
configure the serial port:
MODE COM1 96,E,7,1,N
2. Type the following command lines and press Enter:
COPY CON COM1
ABCDEF^Z
where:
COPY CON COM1 tells the PC to copy the next line of information to
communications port COM1.
ABCDEF are random characters typed at the host.
^Z (Ctrl-Z) sends the information to the printer.
The printer prints the following characters:
4400U.012
Note: If you are using a different platform to communicate with your printer,
please refer to your system user's manual for information on downloading
commands.
2-15
3
Using the Control Panel
HelvC NugFont
ode3Using the Control Panel
3
This chapter explains how to read the control panel display, understand the indicator
lights, and operate the printer keys.
About the Control Panel
You can operate the printer directly at the control panel instead of through a
host computer. The control panel provides the means for all direct
communications with the printer. You can use it for many everyday tasks, such
as replacing media, and for less frequently used features, such as resetting
printer parameters.
The list below describes operations that require use of the control panel, based
on different user categories.
•
Printer operators who use the printer daily can use it to open the printer for
general maintenance and to adjust the quality of their labels.
•
System administrators, systems analysts, and programmers can use it to
configure the printer and set printing parameters and security levels.
•
Service technicians can use it to run diagnostic tests on the printer.
Intermec
ALERT
0PEN
4400
SELECT
MENU
ENTER
CONTINUE
POWER
ON LINE
FEED
ON LINE
RELOAD
OFF LINE
4400-13
3-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
HelvC NugFont
Code39
Reading the Display
Messages that indicate printer settings and alert conditions appear on the
control panel display.
Operating Messages These messages appear during normal operation of the
printer. Shown below is an operating message that indicates the printer is
online and ready to print labels:
ONLINE
READY
Menu Messages When you change printing adjustments, messages appear
indicating the selections that are active and the task you are performing. For
example, when you are adjusting the darkness of your labels, a message
similar to the one shown below appears:
DARK ADJUST
5*
The asterisk (*) appears next to the current setting.
Error Messages Error messages indicate a problem with the printer or the data
from the host. The message shown below indicates the supply of thermal
transfer ribbon is depleted or jammed:
RIBBON FAULT
See Chapter 9 for instructions on clearing error messages.
Understanding the Indicator Lights
The control panel has three lights that indicate the current operating status of
the printer. All three are lit briefly when the printer is turned on.
Alert
This light flashes when a condition arises that requires your attention, such as
an open paper path. A message describing the alert condition is displayed. A
beep will sound at regular intervals until the problem is corrected.
Power
This light remains on as long as the printer is turned on and is receiving power.
3-4
HelvC NugFont
ode3Using the Control Panel
3
Online
When lit, this light indicates the printer is online (it can receive data from the
host computer). While the printer is online, the only commands you can access
from the control panel are the commands in the Operator menu.
Using the Operator Keys
There are three Operator keys that are beneath the indicator lights on the
control panel.
Key
Description
[OPEN]
Opens the printer. This key is only operational when the
printer is offline.
[FEED/RELOAD]
Advances media to the next label and feeds media when
reloading. This key is only operational when the printer is
offline.
[ONLINE/OFFLINE]
Toggles the printer between online and offline. When
online, the printer prints any data it receives. When
offline, the printer stops printing and cannot accept data
(but can accept protocol commands) from the host
computer.
[ONLINE/OFFLINE]
For most front panel operations, the printer must be offline. The following
message and the online indicator light show the printer is online:
ONLINE
READY
Press [ONLINE/OFFLINE] to toggle between online and offline. When offline,
the online indicator light is off and the display shows:
OFFLINE
READY
3-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
HelvC NugFont
Code39
[OPEN]
Make sure the printer is offline before you open or close it (when it is offline, it
stops printing).
To open and close the printer
1. Press [OPEN] to unlock the cover, and then lift it up. The Alert light flashes
and the display shows:
PAPER PATH OPEN
2. Close the cover. The display shows:
PRESS RELOAD
3. Press [FEED/RELOAD]. The media is advanced and the display shows
OFFLINE READY.
[FEED/RELOAD]
When the printer is offline, you can use the [FEED/RELOAD] key to reload
media or advance the media. Pressing this key once advances media to the next
print point. Pressing it twice feeds an entire blank label through the printer.
Using the Selection Keys to Access the Menus
The six keys located above the indicator lights are used for accessing printer
features and label adjustments. As you go through these procedures, refer to
the circle on page 3-9. This will help you understand how to access the features
shown on the circle.
The table below lists a brief description of each selection key.
3-6
Key
Description
[↑] and [↓]
Scrolls through menus and choices of selections within menus.
[SELECT]
Selects menus and features, and returns to the last adjustment
screen after you have left the menus. This key also selects a digit
to be changed when changing parameters.
[ENTER]
Activates a selected option. This key also starts a selected Test or
Service function.
[MENU]
Returns to a menu list so you can change menus.
[CONTINUE]
Exits the menus.
HelvC NugFont
ode3Using the Control Panel
3
About the Printer Menus
The four menus in the Main menu divide the features of the printer into
categories described by the title of each menu. Use this table to locate the menu
you will use the most, based on the tasks you are performing with the printer.
Menu
Description
User
Operator
Used for setting media sensitivity and for
making fine adjustments to the darkness, print
alignment and cutoff point of your labels. This
menu can be accessed when the printer is
online or offline.
Operators who use the printer
daily.
Install
Select communication parameters and security
levels and install printer options. The printer
must be offline to access this menu.
Programmers, systems analysts,
or other personnel who install
and set up the printer
Service
Set and adjust operating features, calibrate
printer sensors, and test current settings. The
printer must be offline to access this menu.
Technicians or other personnel
qualified to do repair and service.
Configuration
Change the operating parameters and activate
or disable optional features. The printer must
be offline to access this menu.
Programmers, systems analysts,
or supervisors who program and
set up the commands for the
printer and label formats.
Accessing the Main Menu
The selections for changing the printer settings are divided into four menus
that cover four different categories for maintaining and customizing your
printer. These four menus are listed in the Main menu, which is shown on page
3-9 as the first circle of menus from the center.
To access the Main menu
1. Make sure the printer is offline and the display shows:
OFFLINE
READY
2. Press [MENU]. The display shows:
OFFLINE
OPERATOR MENU
3. Press [↓]. The display shows:
OFFLINE
INSTALL MENU
4. Continue pressing the [↑] and [↓] keys to scroll through the Main menus.
3-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
HelvC NugFont
Code39
Moving Around Within the Circle
The circle lets you review all of the printer features at once. Once you are used
to using the circle to access the menus and features you need, you will find it
quite useful for whenever you need to quickly locate and change a feature.
This manual contains complete procedures for activating or changing each
feature shown in the circle and it is not necessary for you to know how to use
the circle to follow these procedures. The circle shows the menu structure in the
following way:
•
The ONLINE READY or OFFLINE READY screen is in the middle.
•
As you move outwards, you see the menu levels. The final level, at the
edge, contains the settings.
To use the circle
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY
display (only the Operator
menu is accessible from
ONLINE READY).
Intermec
4400
2. Press [MENU] to enter the
Main menu.
3. Press [↑] or [↓] to reach the
menu you need.
4. Press [SELECT] when you reach
the right menu.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to find
and select the features you are
changing.
6. Press [ENTER] to activate the
new setting.
7. Press [CONTINUE] to return to
the Ready display.
3-8
ALERT
0PEN
SELECT
MENU
ENTER
CONTINUE
POWER
ON LINE
FEED
ON LINE
RELOAD
OFF LINE
4400-13
3
ode3Using the Control Panel
HelvC NugFont
SEL
F-ST
RIP
N/A
N/
A
NU
PRIN
U9
HR
0T
N
/A
N
/A
N/
A
RIT
M
Y
S AX
LEV
LA ENS PRI
EL
LE
0
BE IT NT
VE
IV
SP
L1
L
L
I
T
E
E
R
V
ED
ES Y
LE EL 2
T
VE
PO
L3
2.5
IN
IP
00
S
T
0
to
to
8.5
-2
9
99
0
IP
S
to
-1
+2
0
0
to
+1
0
ME
OR
AT
ER
OP
GERMAN
FRENCH
NORWAY/DENMARK
CHARACTER SET
SWEDEN/FINLAND
SPANISH
ITALIAN
TRAN
256 CH
SLATI
ARACTE
ON
RS
D
ISABLE
POW
ER-O
D
ENAB
N
AUD
LE
IBLE
ONLIN D
E
ALA
ASC
OFFL
RM
II Z
INE
ER
DISA
O
EM
ENA BLED
UL
B
L
AT
ED
NO
ION
T
UN
SLA SLAS
I
HED
S
LA TS
DIS HED
BE
AB
PR
LED
L
863
6/4
PR INT RET
6
8
R
H
63
10
IN
AC
MIL
TH EAD
IN 6/46
T
C
†
EA
TE
MI HE 15 M
D
ST
IL
DI LLIM S
†
RA
S
E
EN AB
TE
NG
L
RS
W AB E
E
W AR LED D
AR N
-4
5% N - CO
HA NT
to
LT IN
UE
+6
5%
EST
UTE T
EXEC
-99)
(1
Y
NTIT
QUA
T
TES
E
T
CU
)
EXE
-99
1
(
Y
TIT
AN
QU
TE
T
TES
* Menu appears only
if option is installed.
E
CU
XE
ST
E TE
CUT
EXE
E
S
TEST
EXECUTE
EXECUTE TEST
E TEST
EXECUT
TES
UTE
EXE
C
AG
TP
RMAT
T FO
PRIN
0 THRU 25
ALL
9
RU 1
0 TH
ALL
S
PRINT FONT
ALL
ALL
0 THRU 99
PRINT GRAPHICS
G
ELS
ED
DEFIN
HARDW
ARE
PRINT
CONFI
LAB
EST
TT
PRIN
USER
ITY
BEL
H LA
AL
T
PITC
D
LE
ED
AB
BL
SA
DI
QU
INT
PR
A
N/
CU
SE
INSTALL MENU
G
IN
T
ON
IN
CL
PR
E
LIN
TA
DA
IC
H
IV
EN
CE
RE
ER
AP
ER
R
G
ND
SE
D
N
SE
L
A
N/
AL
ST
2T
D
EE
*
TE
0
+1
IP
E
IP
TR
UT
8.5
ED
BL
D
SA
LE
DI
AB
ED
EN
BL
SA
D
DI
LE
"
AB
9
EN
99
99
TO
9"
0"
99
D
TO
LE
0"
AB
DIS BLED
A
EN
ST
TO
-S
*
TE
2.5
S
IP
LF
EC
SIC
SE
EX
BA
H
ER
GT
TT
RN
EN
CU
WA
AL
DI EDIA
ME
M
G
W
NIN
LO
AR
TW
SE
E
ICE
RV
SE
T
UT
CONF
IGUR
MENU ATION
U
ER
EC
OPTIO
MAIN
READY
AL
EX
EL
LAB
DIA
A
ST
JU
AD ST
U
J
AD
FO RK
DA
S
RM
N
ME
S
A
N/
10
O
H
HIG W
0
SP
LO
-1
4"
DS
T
O2
IN
AN
RE
B
"T
1
U
PR
E
4.4"
S
H
TO
ES
AG
S
.2"
GT
IM
PR
N
UOU
E
D
A
NTIN AP
LL
O
E
C
HE
EL G
LAB IDTH
B
A
X
L
RK
MA EL W
L MA
S
LABE
LAB
K
TRAN
MAL
TOC
AL
EL S
THER
THERM
LAB
T
C
E
DIR
TYPE
CII
AS
IA
D
US
E
M
UK ASCII
to
ME
N/
NS
POR
T
ES
BL
TA
MP
PRINT
AMBIENT TE
MP
PUT
DISPLAY
EAD TE
OUT
PRINTH
PRINT
SOR
SEN
OPEN
Y
ATH
DISPLA T
INT P
R
N
P
AKE
PRIN
EL T
LAB
LAY
S
RK
DISP T
MA
AN
P
PRIN
TR
GA
Y
PLA
VE
I
DIS INT
R
CT
PR Y
IVE
LE
L
CE
PLA
AL
SE
RE
DIS RINT
D
E
P
EN
G
Y
S
A
PA
PL
AT
DIS
ND
N/A
RM NT
SE
FO
FO
D
T
N
S
ND
TE 9
SE
TE
SE
0- L
CU
L
E
A 9
N/A
EX
-1
0 ALL
5
A
-2
N/
0 ALL
9
9
-9
N/A
0
1- T
S
GE
PA E TE 19
TO UT
1
A
T
N/
EC MAT TES 9
1
EX
OR TE 3 T
S
F
U
ST
T
TE
TO XEC ON
A
TE 99
TE
N/
E
F
E
U
T
0
O
EC
T
U
T
X
C
S
E
EC HI
TE
/A
E
EX AP
T
N
R
U
G
EC
ST
EX
TO
TE
A
N/
TE
U
T
S
EC
TE
EX
TE
U
C
E
EX
CUT
TER
5
A TO Z, 0 TO
RNAL
D
AN
M
M
C
FO ON
DI
N
S
PA NT FIG
EN AB /A
GE S/G U
DI AB LED
S/ R RA
L
S
FO AP TI
EN ABL ED
RM HI ON
DIS ABL ED
PR
AB ED
AT CS
EN
LE
IN
A S
A
T
D
DIS BL
HE
N/ LL
AB ED
A
D
A
M
EN
L
HE
F
EM
AB ED
AN
AD
L
DIS
TT
O
LIF
A ED
RS
RY
T
ENA BLED
CU
UP
TT
BLE
RE
P
T
RT
LY
TE
SE
PRIN D
AK
R
EU
T
C
DISP T
MA
LE
P
IN D
LAY
A
M
RIV
MIN
PRIN
N
OT
E
IM
T
O
UM
DISP
RT
OHM
LAY
ES
S
MAXIM
TS
PRINT
UM O
HMS
DISPLA
Y
AVERAG
E OHM
PRINT
PRIN
S
THEA
DISPLAY
D
12V
PRINT
PWR SUPPLY
DISPLAY
24V
VOLTS
MARK
CALIBRATE SENSOR
N/A
GAP
NONE
DRESS
DEVICE AD
EXTE
XON/XOFF
MULTIDROP
POLLING MODE D
STANDARD
1
2
CO
A
PROTOCOL
N/
TS
STOP BI
0
20
19 00
96 00
48 00
24 00
12 0
60 0
30
0
11
E
T
7
RA
D
U
8
BA
255
512
ITS
TH
B
D
G
OD
EN
TA
L
A
D
N
GE
A
EVE
S
S
K
ME
MAR
E
SPAC
Y
F
IT
F
R
O
PA
Using the Main Menu
† 8637/38 13mil for
6.5mil printhead.
Wheel-6x7
3-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
HelvC NugFont
Code39
Tips for Using the Control Panel
Press
To Move
When You Want To
[SELECT]
Outwards towards the edge of the circle.
Select a menu choice.
[MENU]
In towards the center of the circle.
Return to a menu.
Note: Use this key to enter the Main menu.
[↑] or [↓]
Around the circle.
Scroll through menu choices.
[CONTINUE]
Back into the center.
Exit menus and return to READY.
[ENTER]
3-10
Activate a setting.
•
To determine the printer’s present configuration, print a configuration test
label as described in Chapter 1.
•
To stop printing immediately, without losing data, press
[ONLINE/OFFLINE].
•
To go directly back to the screen where the last adjustment was made, press
[SELECT] at the ONLINE READY or OFFLINE READY screen. This feature
saves many keystrokes when making trial-and-error adjustments.
•
To go directly back to the menu where the last adjustment was made, press
[MENU] at the ONLINE READY or OFFLINE READY screen. This feature
saves many keystrokes when making trial-and-error adjustments.
•
To return to the previous menu, press [MENU] from within a menu. This
feature is convenient if you are making many setting changes.
•
When you finish making an offline adjustment and wish to go right back to
online printing, press [ONLINE/OFFLINE]. This feature returns you
directly to the ONLINE READY screen.
4
Operating the Printer
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Operating the Printer
4
This chapter explains how to open and close the printer, load media, change the
thermal transfer ribbon, set the sensitivity rating for your media, set the dark adjust,
set the forms adjust, adjust the label rest point, and print the buffer contents.
About Printer Operation
Your 4400 printer comes with a wide variety of features and many choices for
configuring and programming. However, normal operation is quite
straightforward. The printer is designed to continually produce high quality
labels in harsh environments with minimal supervision and maintenance.
The Operator menu in the printer contains four selections that let you adjust
the media sensitivity, print darkness, print alignment and label rest point
(perforation point). Since operators must also reload media, clear jams, and
perform other maintenance tasks, this chapter includes procedures for these
activities as well as for using the Operator menu.
Refer to Chapter 1 if you need to locate a part of the printer or a description of
the part’s function.
Opening and Closing the Printer
The following procedures describe how to open and close the printer for
replacing media, clearing paper jams, or performing maintenance.
Opening the Printer With Power On
1. Make sure the printer is turned on.
2. If the printer is online, press [ONLINE/OFFLINE]. Printing stops and the
display shows:
OFFLINE
READY
3. Press [OPEN] to unlatch the cover. Refer to the following figure. Lift up the
cover to expose the paper path. The display shows:
PAPER PATH OPEN
4-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Opening the Printer With Power On
OPEN
0P
EN
Opening the Printer With Power Off
1. Make sure the printer is turned off or the printer is unplugged.
2. Turn the knob on the Ribbon Access Door one quarter turn
counterclockwise, and then lift the door away from the printer.
3. Press down on the cover release and open the printer to expose the paper
path.
4. When you are ready to close the printer, replace the Ribbon Access Door.
Make sure that the grip on the knob is in the Open or vertical position.
Then position the door on the printer and press it into place, making sure it
seats evenly.
5. Lock the door into place by turning the knob 1/4 turn clockwise.
6. Close the paper path by pressing down on the cover until the latch catches.
4-4
Co d e 39
HelvC NugFont
Operating the Printer
4
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
ER
T
MEN
EN
U
TE
R
0P
EN
PO
WE
R
CO
NT
INUE
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-44B
Closing the Printer
1. Close the cover until the catch latches. The display shows:
PRESS RELOAD
2. Press [FEED/RELOAD]. The display shows:
OFFLINE
READY
3. Press [ONLINE/OFFLINE]. The display shows:
ONLINE
READY
4-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Closing the Printer
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
MEN
EN
ER
U
TE
T
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WE
NT
INUE
R
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
Opening and Closing the Printer With the Media Alert
Enabled
1. If the printer is online, press [ONLINE/OFFLINE]. Printing stops and the
display shows:
OFFLINE
READY
2. Press [OPEN] and lift the cover. The display shows:
PAPER PATH OPEN
3. After changing media or clearing a jam, close the printer. The display
shows:
PRESS RELOAD
4. Press [FEED/RELOAD]. The display shows:
RESET
MEDIA ALERT?
4-6
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Operating the Printer
4
5. Follow one of these two steps:
•
If a new roll of media has been loaded, press [ENTER]. The display
shows:
MEDIA ALERT
RESET COMPLETE
Press [CONTINUE] to return to OFFLINE READY.
•
If you have not changed the media, press [CONTINUE] to return to
OFFLINE READY.
6. Press [ONLINE/OFFLINE] to return to the ONLINE READY display and
resume printing.
Loading Media Into the Printer
The procedures on the next few pages explain how to load media (label stock)
into the printer. If you are using the Media Alert feature, see “Opening and
Closing the Printer With the Media Alert Enabled” earlier in this chapter.
Opening the Edge Guides
1. Slide the edge guides apart by pulling the tab on the outside edge guide
away from the center.
2. Remove any pieces of media from the paper path.
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
ME
EN
ER
TE
T
NU
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WE
NT
INU
R
E
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LIN
OF
F LIN E
E
4400-40B
4-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Removing the Media Roll and Shaft
You may need to remove the media roll core and shaft when you replace the
roll media.
To remove the media roll and shaft
1. Lift the roll shaft off the roll hanger arms.
2. Remove the media roll core from the shaft and throw it away.
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
MEN
EN
ER
U
TE
T
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WE
NT
INUE
R
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-54B
Installing a New Media Roll
1. Install a new roll of media on the roll shaft between the collets. Make sure
the labels are sent underneath the tension bar before entering the printer.
2. Place the shaft on the hanger arms.
4-8
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Operating the Printer
4
4400-29B
Feeding Media Into the Printer
Note: If you are using fanfold media, open the media box and place it in back of the
printer so the media feeds easily into the printer.
1. Feed the end of the media into the opening in the back of the printer. Make
sure the labels are facing up.
Note: If you are using roll media, make sure the labels are fed under the tension
bar before they enter the printer.
4-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Feeding Media Into the Printer
4400-39B
2. Continue feeding media until several inches extend from the front of the
printer.
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
ER
T
MEN
EN
U
TE
R
0P
EN
PO
WE
R
CO
NT
INUE
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-55B
4-10
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
4
Operating the Printer
Adjusting the Edge Guides
1. Push the tab on the outside edge guide in until the inside edge just touches
the edge of the media.
2. Make sure that the media does not pinch or buckle in the label path.
3. Close the printer.
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
MEN
EN
ER
U
TE
T
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WE
NT
INU
R
E
FE
RE
ED
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LIN
OF
F LIN E
E
4400-56B
4. If you have opened a new box of media, be sure to check the media
sensitivity rating. See “Setting the Media Sensitivity Number” later in this
chapter. If the sensitivity rating is correct, the printer is now ready to print.
4-11
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Changing Thermal Transfer Ribbon
The following procedures explain how to load thermal transfer ribbon into the
printer if you are printing on thermal transfer media.
Removing the Ribbon Access Door
1. Make sure the printer is turned on.
2. Turn the large knob on the door 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
3. Lift the door away from the printer.
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
MEN
EN
ER
U
TE
T
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WE
NT
INUE
R
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-43B
4-12
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Operating the Printer
4
Loading the Thermal Transfer Ribbon
1. Remove and discard the used ribbon and inner cores on the ribbon supply
and takeup hubs.
2. Remove and discard the protective wrapping on the new ribbon supply.
3. Slide the supply roll onto the supply hub until the notches engage the keys
on the hub. Make sure the ribbon unwinds from the bottom of the roll. See
View 1 in the figure on the next page.
4. Pull the ribbon around underneath the printhead assembly and up to the
takeup hub. See View 2 in the figure on the next page.
5. Slide the ribbon takeup core onto the takeup hub, making sure the notches
engage the keys on the takeup hub.
6. Wind the ribbon onto the takeup core until the inked part of the ribbon is
past the printhead.
7. Make sure that you enable the thermal transfer ribbon command for the
printer. Using the control panel, in the Configuration menu, select Label,
Media Type, and Thermal Transfer.
4-13
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Loading the Thermal Transfer Ribbon
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
ME
EN
ER
NU
TE
T
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WE
NT
INU
R
E
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LIN
OF
FL E
INE
View 1
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
MEN
EN
ER
U
TE
T
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WER
NT
INUE
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LINE
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
View 2
4400-58B
4-14
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Operating the Printer
4
Replacing the Ribbon Access Door
1. Make sure that the grip on the knob is in the Open (vertical) position.
2. Position the door on the printer and press it into place, making sure it seats
evenly.
3. Lock the door into place by turning the knob 1/4 turn clockwise.
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
ER
T
MEN
EN
U
TE
R
0P
EN
PO
WE
R
CO
NT
INUE
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-59B
4-15
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Setting the Media Sensitivity Number
Media sensitivity is important because you use it to optimize print quality and
print speed. The three-digit sensitivity number specifies the amount of heat
required by the printhead to image a label. The amount of heat that each roll of
media or ribbon requires is unique to different chemistries and manufacturing
processes.
Intermec has developed heating schedules (the amount of heat required to
image a label) to produce the highest possible print quality for Intermec media
and ribbon combinations on Intermec printers. Look for the three digit media
sensitivity number on:
•
The side of the media roll. Use the last three digits (140 in the example) of
the 15 digit number stamped on the roll for the media sensitivity number.
•
A small label attached to the roll of the media.
•
A small label attached to the plastic bag of your ribbon roll.
120066102605140
SENSITIVITY NUMBER
120066102605140
5✩7
4400G.015
Use this three-digit number to optimize print quality and print speed on the
4400 printer. You can achieve the best print quality on the 4400 printer by using
Intermec ribbon and media products.
Use the information on the packaging that you saved when loading media and
ribbon to determine the correct sensitivity number.
When you load media into the printer, you should check to see that the
sensitivity rating for the media matches the rating set in the printer. The
default values set the correct sensitivity for most printing needs.
Direct thermal media
Thermal transfer media
4-16
420
567
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Operating the Printer
4
When you set Sensitivity in the printer to match the rating for your media, the
amount of energy the printhead uses is adjusted to a value that is suitable for
your media. This improves print quality and sets the darkness to an
appropriate level.
You only need to enter the first digit to set the approximate rating for your
media. Setting the other two digits is recommended for fine-tuning the
sensitivity to improve print quality.
First Digit The first digit (in the hundreds place, at the left) designates the
range of sensitivity for your media.
Second and Third Digits The second and third digits are used to fine-tune the
printhead energy to improve print quality and darkness of your labels.
Setting the Media Sensitivity Number for Thermal Transfer
Media
The sensitivity rating, printed on each roll of thermal transfer media or ribbon,
has an asterisk (*) in place of one of the digits. On thermal transfer media, the
rating contains the first and second digits, and then an asterisk in place of the
third digit because this digit is reserved for ribbon. The rating on the ribbon has
the first and third digits, with an asterisk in place of the second digit because
this digit is reserved for media.
For example, you may see 56* on the media, and 5*7 on the ribbon. To finetune the printhead for your media, you should set the sensitivity to 567.
Note: If you change media types often, you may decide to choose types with the same
first digit in their sensitivity rating and then set sensitivity to that digit only. This will
make it unnecessary to alter the setting each time you change to a different type of
media. See the following tables to compare settings for various types of media.
Setting the Media Sensitivity Number for Other Media and
Ribbons
If you are not using Intermec media and ribbon, or you misplaced your
packaging with the three-digit sensitivity number label on it, you can set the
approximate sensitivity setting. The approximate sensitivity numbers are the
first entry (in bold text) for each series in the media sensitivity settings table on
the following pages. Enter the three-digit approximate sensitivity setting (for
example, 800) to achieve acceptable print quality.
4-17
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Use the following tables to find the correct sensitivity rating for you direct
thermal media or thermal transfer media and ribbon combination.
Direct Thermal Media and Ribbon Sensitivity Settings
Approximate Sensitivity Ratings
Sensitivity
Setting
Thermal Transfer Media/Ribbon
700 Series High Sensitivity
740
Duratherm Lightning Plus-1
720
Duratherm Lightning Plus-2
480
Duratherm Lightning IR-2
470
Duratherm Lightning-1
460
European Thermal IR
450
Duratherm Lightning IR-1
440
European Thermal Economy
430
Duratherm Lightning Synthetic
420
Duratherm Lightning-2
190
Duratherm Buff Tags
180
Duratherm II-1
170
European Thermal Top Board/Reinforced
160
Duratherm II Tag
150
Duratherm Buff Labels
140
European Thermal Top
130
Duratherm II-2
120
European Thermal Economy Tag
400 Series Medium Sensitivity
100 Series Low Sensitivity
4-18
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Operating the Printer
4
Thermal Transfer Media and Ribbon Sensitivity Settings
Approximate Sensitivity Ratings
Sensitivity
Setting
Thermal Transfer Media/Ribbon
800 Series High Sensitivity (Paper)
864
European Uncoated/Standard
854
Duratran I/Standard
834
Duratran I Tag/Standard
687
Duratran Matte Polyester/Premium
677
Duratran Syntran/Premium
647
Duratran Tyvek/Premium
633
European Polyethylene/Premium
627
Duratran Kimdura/Premium
567
Duratran II-1/Premium
565
Duratran European/Premium
547
Duratran II-2/Premium
533
European Tag/Premium
527
Duratran II Tag-5 mil and 7 mil/Premium
513
European Coated and Board Tag/Premium
369
Super Premium Poly./Super Premium 3
366
Super Premium Poly./Super Premium 7
238
Gloss Polyimide (Kapton)/Gloss Super Premium 7
236
Gloss Polyimide (Kapton)/Super Premium 7
226
Matte Polyimide (Kapton)/Super Premium 7
222
Matte Polyimide (Kapton)/Matte Super Premium
600 Series Medium Sensitivity (Plastic)
500 Series Medium Sensitivity (Paper)
300 Series Low Sensitivity (Plastic)
200 Series Low Sensitivity (Plastic)
4-19
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
You should check the Sensitivity rating each time you open a new box of
media, and change it if necessary.
To change the sensitivity rating
1. Start at the ONLINE READY display:
ONLINE
READY
2. Press [MENU] to enter the Operator menu. Then press [↑] or [↓] until you
see the display:
OPERATOR MENU
SENSITIVITY
3. Press [SELECT]. The current setting appears with a cursor under the first
digit:
SENSITIVITY
420*
4. If the setting is correct, skip to Step 8. Otherwise, press [↑] to increase the
digit, or press [↓] to decrease it:
SENSITIVITY
320*
5. Press [SELECT] until the cursor is under the digit you need to change as
shown in the example below:
SENSITIVITY
420
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the setting is correct.
Note: Pressing [SELECT] at the last digit moves you to the first digit.
7. Press [ENTER] to activate the new setting.
8. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the ONLINE READY display.
Setting the Dark Adjust
Print darkness can be adjusted when the printer is online or offline. The dark
adjust setting is for fine-tuning only. As long as you set the sensitivity rating, a
darkness setting of zero should provide optimal print quality. However, as the
printhead wears or if you use a lot of media, some adjustment may be
necessary.
Check the sensitivity rating first before using the Dark Adjust command.
4-20
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Operating the Printer
4
To adjust the darkness of your labels
1. Start at the ONLINE READY display:
ONLINE
READY
2. Press [MENU] to enter the Operator menu. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display
shows:
OPERATOR MENU
DARK ADJUST
3. Press [SELECT]. The display shows the current dark adjust setting with an
asterisk (*) as shown in the example below:
DARK ADJUST
5*
4. Press [↑] to increase the number and darken the printing. Press [↓] to
decrease the number and lighten the printing. The range is from -10
(lightest) to 10 (darkest).
5. Press [ENTER] at the desired setting. The asterisk (*) moves to the new
setting as shown in the example below:
DARK ADJUST
3*
6. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the ONLINE READY display. Print out a
few labels. You may want to scan some labels to see if they are too dark or
light to scan.
7. If the labels are too dark or too light, repeat Steps 3 through 6.
Using the X and Y Forms Adjust
If the print on your labels is not positioned correctly, you can center the printed
image with the X and Y Forms Adjust. The X Forms Adjust lets you adjust the
position of the printed image in the direction of media movement (moves the
print further towards the front or back of the label). The Y Forms Adjust lets
you adjust the position of the print in the direction parallel to the front of the
printhead (moves the print towards the sides of the label). You can use X and Y
Forms Adjust when the printer is online or offline.
Note: Make sure you set the Label Width before you use the Forms Adjust command.
Refer to ”Configuring the Label Width,” in Chapter 5.
4-21
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
-X➤
➤ +X
➤
-Y *FORMAT*
*FORMAT*
➤
+Y
➤
Direction of media from printer
4400B-138
You can adjust the print alignment on your labels without interrupting normal
label production. The following example uses the X Forms Adjust feature. The
procedure is performed the same way for the Y Forms Adjust feature.
Note: The x-dimension is also affected by the Top-of-Form configuration command.
For more information, see “Top-of-Form, Set” in Chapter 7.
To adjust the print alignment (example)
1. Start at the ONLINE READY display:
ONLINE
READY
2. Press [MENU] to enter the Operator menu. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display
shows:
OPERATOR MENU
X FORMS ADJUST
3. Press [SELECT]. The display shows the current X Forms Adjust setting
with an asterisk (*) as shown in the example below:
X FORMS ADJUST
0*
4. Press [↑] to increase the number and move the print towards the back of the
printer. Press [↓] to decrease the number and move the print towards the
front of the printer.
4-22
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Operating the Printer
4
Note: The range for the X Forms Adjust is from -20 (furthest towards the front) to
+20 (furthest towards the back). The range for the Y Forms Adjust is from -30
(closest to the top) to +30 (closest to the bottom).
5. Press [ENTER] at the desired setting. The asterisk (*) moves to the new
setting as shown in the example below:
X FORMS ADJUST
3*
6. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the ONLINE READY display. Print out a
few labels.
7. If the print is not positioned properly, repeat Steps 3 through 6.
Adjusting the Label Rest Point
This command is used mostly with the Self-strip option. If you are using SelfStrip, you may find that your labels are not stopping at the right point for
removal and you are tearing off part of a label each time you remove one from
the printer. Adjusting the label rest point changes the point at which labels are
presented for removal.
To adjust the label rest point
1. Start at the ONLINE READY display:
ONLINE
READY
2. Press [MENU] to enter the Operator menu. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display
shows:
OPERATOR MENU
LABEL REST POINT
3. Press [SELECT]. The display shows the current Label Rest Point setting
with an asterisk (*) as shown in the example below:
LABEL REST POINT
0*
4. Press [↑] to increase the number and move the labels farther before tearing
them off. Press [↓] to decrease the number so the labels do not move as far
forward before you tear them off.
Note: The range for the Label Rest Point is from -30 to +30 dots.
4-23
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
5. Press [ENTER] at the desired setting. The asterisk (*) moves to the new
setting as shown in the example below:
LABEL REST POINT
3*
6. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the ONLINE READY display. Print out a
few labels.
7. If the labels do not stop at the right point on the tear bar or cutter, repeat
Steps 3 through 6.
Printing the Buffer Contents
You can print the data that is stored in the printer memory when the printer is
offline. This clears the printer’s data buffer so you can print the labels stored in
the buffer before turning off the printer.
To print the buffer contents
1. At the ONLINE READY display, press [ONLINE/OFFLINE]. The printer
stops printing and the display shows:
OFFLINE
READY
2. Press [CONTINUE]. The printer resumes printing. Since it is offline and
cannot receive new data, it prints only what is in the printer buffer.
3. When printing stops, the buffer is empty.
About Error Messages
If the printer encounters a problem that prevents it from operating properly,
the Alert light flashes and an error message appears on the display. An alarm
will also sound at regular intervals until the problem is corrected. If the
problem affects printing, the printer will stop and wait for you to clear the error
message.
If you get an error message, refer to Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting.”
4-24
5
Configuring the Printer
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Configuring the Printer
5
This chapter explains how to set the configuration parameters for optimizing label
quality, printer performance and print speed, emulating an 8636/46 printer, and
customizing your printer for media type, media alert, and character set. It also
explains how to restore the factory default configuration.
About Printer Configuration
When you configure your printer, you customize it to meet your distinct
operational needs, which include optimizing the print quality and print speed
of your labels. The printer is shipped with default configuration settings that
work in most operating environments, but are easily changed if necessary. The
4400 printer has a large variety of configuration settings as shown on the
foldout page in the previous chapter. Use this circle to familiarize yourself with
all the options available under the Configuration menu.
Changing the Basic Configuration Settings
The following table shows all the configuration settings available under Basic
in the Configuration menu, except the Printhead Range setting. (For
information on this setting, see “Adjusting the Printhead Range” later in this
chapter.) Commands to enable options (Self-Strip or Cutter) are marked with
an asterisk (*) since they appear on the menu only after being installed. Default
values are shown in bold.
Note: For some commands you must cycle the power (turn the printer off and then on
again) or press [FEED/RELOAD] after changing the setting. Cycling the power puts
all changes into effect at once.
5-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Basic Configuration Settings
Command
Settings
Description
Character Set
US ASCII, UK ASCII, German,
French, Norway/Denmark,
Sweden/Finland, Spanish,
Italian, 256 ISO Characters
Selects the character set for the language being
used.
Translation
Enabled, Disabled
Enables IBM character translation for the selected
printer language.
Power-On
Online, Offline
Sets the printer to online or offline when it is
turned on.
Audible Alarm
Enabled, Disabled
Enables audible alarm (beep) for alert conditions.
ASCII Zero
Slashed, Not Slashed
Selects whether zeros are printed with a slash.
Emulation
8636/46 10 mil, 8636/46 15 mil,
(8637/38 13 mil for 4400 users
with a 6.5 mil printhead),
Disabled
Emulates an Intermec 8636 or an 8646 printer. The
4400 printers with the 6.5 mil printhead can
emulate 8637 or 8638 printers. Cycle the power
after changing this setting.
Units
Inches, Millimeters
Displays measurements in selected units.
Label Retract
Enabled, Disabled
Retracts a label before printing to prevent skipped
labels. Press [FEED/RELOAD] after changing this
setting.
Printhead Test
Warn - Continue,
Warn - Halt
Determines whether printing continues if the
Printhead Test sends a warning.
Printhead
Range
-45% to +45%
Determines the percentage by which the elements
may deviate in resistance before generating a
warning.
Self-Strip*
Enabled, Disabled
External option that stops the printer at each label
so the backing can be removed. Press
[FEED/RELOAD] after changing this setting.
Cutter*
Enabled, Disabled
External option that cuts labels as they are printed.
Press [FEED/RELOAD] after changing this setting.
5-4
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Configuring the Printer
5
To change the default values
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display (if necessary, press
[ONLINE/OFFLINE]).
2. Press [MENU]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
CONFIGURATION
3. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
CONFIGURATION
LABEL
4. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
CONFIGURATION
BASIC
5. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
BASIC
CHARACTER SET
6. Press [↑] or [↓] to scroll through the available commands.
7. Press [SELECT] when you reach the command you want to change. The
display shows the current setting with an asterisk (*).
8. Press [↑] or [↓] to scroll through the available settings for the command.
9. When you see the setting you want, press [ENTER]. The asterisk (*)
appears next to the new setting, indicating it is now active.
10. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the OFFLINE READY display or, to change
other settings, press [MENU] and repeat Steps 6 through 9.
5-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Changing the Label Configuration Settings
To obtain the best print quality, you must adapt your printer to print at the
desired print speed on the type of media (label stock) you are using. Your
Intermec Media Products representative can recommend media types for your
system.
The following table shows the available settings for optimizing print quality
and speed with the commands under Label in the Configuration menu. Default
values are shown in bold.
Command
Settings
Description
Print Speed
2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 5.5, 6.0,
6.5, 7.0, 7.5, 8.5, 10 in/sec (64,
76, 90, 104, 117, 132, 142, 153,
165, 180, 198, 221, 254 mm/sec)
Sets the rate at which labels are printed. See
“Optimizing the Print Speed and Image Bands”
later in this chapter.
Image Bands
2 to 10. Default is 3.
Controls the amount of printer memory that is
allocated to create label images.
Head Pressure
Low, High
Changes the printhead pressure. Pressure should
be set to Low for labels and High for tag stock.
See ”Printhead Pressure” later in this chapter.
Max Label Length
1 to 24 in (25 mm to 600 mm).
Default is 5 in (125 mm).
Sets maximum amount of label stock the printer
will advance before looking for low stock.
Label Width
0.20 to 4.40 inches in
increments of 0.05 inches (5 to
112 mm)
Calculates the image position according to the
label width. See “Configuring the Label Width”
later in this chapter. Press [FEED/RELOAD]
after changing this setting.
Label Stock
Continuous, Label Gap, Label
Mark
Lets the printer recognize where labels start and
end as they are printed. Press [FEED/RELOAD]
after changing this setting.
Media Type
Direct Thermal, Thermal
Transfer
Selects direct thermal or thermal transfer media.
Press [FEED/RELOAD] after changing this
setting.
5-6
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Configuring the Printer
5
To change the default values
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY screen as shown below:
OFFLINE
READY
2. Press [MENU]. The display shows:
OFFLINE
OPERATOR MENU
3. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
CONFIGURATION
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
CONFIGURATION
LABEL
5. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
LABEL
PRINT SPEED
6. Press [↑] or [↓] to scroll through the available commands.
7. Press [SELECT] when you reach the command you want to change. The
display shows the current setting with an asterisk (*).
8. Press [↑] or [↓] to scroll through the available settings for the command.
9. When you see the setting you want, press [ENTER]. The asterisk (*)
appears next to the new setting, indicating it is now active.
10. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the OFFLINE READY display or, to change
other settings, press [MENU] and repeat Steps 6 through 9.
5-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
About the Printhead Test
Each time you turn on the printer, or send a specific command from the host,
the elements in your printhead are tested to make sure they are heating
properly. If an element’s resistance level is above or below the acceptable
range, the printer displays the following warning:
PRINTHEAD TESTED
OUT OF RANGE
When you get this warning, check the print quality of your labels. If the quality
has decreased, contact your Intermec representative. If your labels are
satisfactory, you can adjust the test so the warning coincides with faulty labels.
See “Adjusting the Printhead Test” later in this chapter.
You can make the printer stop printing when it tests out of range by setting the
PRINTHEAD TEST command in the Basic Configuration menu to WARNHALT. In this configuration, the warning appears on the control panel and is
sent to the host. The default value for the printhead test is WARN-CONTINUE.
This command allows the printer to continue printing upon test failure and
causes a warning to appear on the control panel. No warning is sent to the
host.
Note: If you have a dot out of range, make sure that it affects the quality of your label.
It may apply to a dot that you are not using in your specific format.
Printhead Pressure
The printhead pressure setting controls the pressure applied to the media as it
passes between the platen roller and the printhead. This adjustment helps
compensate for variations in the thickness between tag stock and other label
stock. You can set the pressure as follows:
•
Low for labels
•
High for tag stock
Changing the pressure will not harm the printer. If your labels are slipping, or
you notice the pressure is too light (and the printhead has been cleaned), try
changing the pressure to the other setting.
Note: You may need to remove the tear bar for tag stock.
5-8
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Configuring the Printer
5
Adjusting the Printhead Test
The printer displays the following warning if any of the elements in the
printhead are not within the tolerance resistance values:
PRINTHEAD TESTED
OUT OF RANGE
There are two indications of a faulty printhead:
•
You receive a warning, but your labels look fine. This happens when the
printhead elements that are “out of range” do not affect your labels.
•
You notice a decrease in label quality but the printer does not send a
warning. This may mean that the elements affecting your labels are not
heating perfectly, but are still within the acceptable resistance range.
You can adjust the printhead test so that you receive the warning at a time
when the wear on the printhead is truly affecting your labels. When you adjust
the test, you adjust the resistance range that is considered acceptable.
Note: If you have a dot out of range, make sure that it affects the quality of your label.
It may apply to a dot that you are not using in your specific format.
Note: A decrease in label quality is usually not due to the printhead elements. Check
the sensitivity rating and Dark Adjust commands and then clean the printhead before
adjusting the printhead test.
The Printhead Range Percentage
You adjust the resistance range by increasing or decreasing the percentage by
which the elements may deviate in resistance before generating a warning. This
range extends on both the negative and positive sides of the perfect resistance.
The resistance deviation is caused when the wires that carry energy to the
printhead elements begin to wear out. If the resistance of the wires increases,
the printhead elements do not heat up enough so you need to decrease the
positive side of the range. If the resistance of the wires decreases, the elements
heat up too much so you need to increase the negative range.
5-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Adjusting the Printhead Range
If you get a warning and your labels are fine, widen the range by increasing the
positive side or decreasing the negative side.
If print quality decreases and you did not get a warning, adjust the range as
follows:
•
If the labels show dark streaks, some of the elements are too hot. Increase
the negative range (so that it is less negative).
•
If the streaks or are too light (and the printhead is clean), some elements are
not hot enough. Decrease the positive range.
To adjust the printhead range
1. From OFFLINE READY, press [MENU], and then press [↑] or [↓] until the
display shows:
OFFLINE
CONFIGURATION
2. Press [SELECT]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
CONFIGURATION
BASIC
3. Press [SELECT]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
BASIC
PRINTHEAD RANGE
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows the current settings for the printhead
range. The example below shows the default values.
PRINTHEAD RANGE
-45% TO +45%
5. Press [SELECT] to move the cursor between the negative range and the
positive range.
6. Press [↑] to increase a value, or press [↓] to decrease it. The widest available
range is between ±45% and the narrowest is between ±10%.
Note: The keys work in a circular fashion, so pressing [↑] at the highest value takes
you to the lowest and vice versa.
7. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the OFFLINE READY display.
5-10
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Configuring the Printer
5
Optimizing the Print Speed and Image Bands
In order to print labels as quickly as possible, you must adjust the print speed
in conjunction with the number of image bands. The Print Speed and Image
Band settings determine the rate at which the printer processes the images of
your labels. This in turn affects the speed of the entire printing process.
In the 4400 printer, label printing and image processing occur simultaneously.
For this reason, it is very important that these settings be synchronized. If the
Image Band command is too low, the imaging process is unable to keep up
with the print speed. In this case, the printer stops printing and starts again at
the lowest print speed. If the Image Band command is set too high, the printer
spends too much time imaging, which slows down label production.
About the Image Bands Command
The Image Bands command controls the amount of memory allotted to the
imaging process. When you increase the image band adjustment to a higher
number, you are adding more buffers to the imaging memory. By doing this,
you are giving the printer more memory (and time) to image the label before it
starts printing.
The minimum number of required image bands is dependent upon the print
speed and the complexity of the label. Labels that contain numerous fields with
different rotations, graphics, different sizes of outline fonts, or combinations of
any number of these formatting options may require a higher number of image
bands.
Optimizing Image Bands for Print Speed
To optimize the number of image bands for your print speed, set the image
bands at the lowest number (2) and then print a label at the desired speed. If
the label prints, the Image Band setting is correctly optimized.
If the number of image bands is still too low, the printer aborts the label before
printing is completed and attempts to reprint the label at the slowest speed (2.5
ips) with the highest number of image bands (10). At this point, return to the
original print speed and increase the original number of image bands one at a
time. Continue to increase the number of image bands until the printer prints a
label correctly.
If the printer still aborts and reprints at the highest image band setting, you
may be trying to optimize at a print speed that is too high for your labels. Try
optimizing the number of image bands at a lower print speed.
5-11
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Optimizing Image Bands for Batch Printing
If you frequently print batches of identical labels (using the <US> command),
you may want to optimize the number of image bands for batch printing. This
is especially helpful if you experience delays between the printing of each label.
To optimize the number of image bands for batch printing, you must select
enough image memory to allow the printer to retain the entire label image
PLUS ONE INCH (one image band is equal to 1 inch). Therefore, if the printed
image stops at a distance of 4 inches from the beginning of the label, you must
select five image bands to prevent reimaging.
Note: If you use the quantity count command <RS> instead of <US>, the printer
software assumes that each label is different and will reimage every time a label is
printed.
Configuring the Label Width
Label Width redefines the vertical origin of the printed image. Setting this
command lets the printer reposition the image when media width changes. If
you are printing in a page format, the label width may extend across more than
one label. See the following figure for an illustration of measuring across single
and multiple (page format) labels.
5-12
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Configuring the Printer
5
Direction of media from printer
0.2"-4.4"
0.2"-4.4"
4400-52
To change the label width setting
1. Press the [ONLINE/OFFLINE] key until the control panel display shows
the following:
OFFLINE
READY
2. Press the [MENU] key.
3. Press the up or down arrow key ([↑] or [↓]) until you select the
Configuration menu. The display shows:
OFFLINE
CONFIGURATION
4. Press the [SELECT] key.
5-13
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
5. Press the up or down arrow key ([↑]or [↓]) until the display shows:
CONFIGURATION
LABEL
6. Press the [SELECT] key.
7. Press the up or down arrow key ([↑] or [↓]) until the display shows:
LABEL
LABEL WIDTH
8. Press the [SELECT] key.
9. Press the up or down arrow key ([↑] or [↓]) until the correct width appears
in the display. Then press the [ENTER] key. An asterisk appears next to the
setting.
10. Press the [CONTINUE] key. The printer returns to Offline status.
11. To return the printer to Online status, press the [ONLINE/OFFLINE] key.
Setting the Media Alert
The Media Alert feature can warn you when your media supply is getting low.
When set, it causes the Alert light to flash when the label stock supply gets
down to a preset level. You can also set an audible alarm.
Note: Be sure to reset the media length and low media warn each time a different size
roll of media into the printer. If this is not done, the printer may not give sufficient
warning of a low media condition.
To use the Media Alert, you set three control panel commands that give the
printer the information it needs to run the alert. These commands are
summarized in the table below. The default settings are in bold.
Command
Settings
Description
Media Length
0 to 99999 in. or 0 to
9999999 mm.
Sets the media supply length (in inches or millimeters),
so the printer can count backwards down to the low
media warning point
Low Media Warn
0 to 999 in. or 0 to 99999
mm.
Sets the minimum amount media supply. When the
media reaches this amount, the alert light and low media
warning are activated.
Set Warning
Enabled, Disabled
Enables or disables the Media Alert feature.
5-14
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Configuring the Printer
5
To set the media length
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display. Press [MENU] and then press [↑] or
[↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
CONFIGURATION
2. Press [SELECT] and then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
CONFIGURATION
MEDIA ALERT
3. Press [SELECT] and then press [↑] or [↓] until you see the command you
are changing, such as in the example shown below:
MEDIA ALERT
MEDIA LENGTH
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows the current setting with a cursor under
the first digit, such as shown below:
MEDIA LENGTH
06000 INCHES*
5. Press [SELECT] until the cursor is under the next digit you want to change.
6. Press [↑] to increase the digit or [↓] to decrease the digit.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the number is correct, and then press [ENTER].
Note: Pressing [SELECT] at the last digit moves the cursor to the first digit.
8. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the OFFLINE READY display.
To set the low media warning
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display. Press [MENU] and then press [↑] or
[↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
CONFIGURATION
2. Press [SELECT] and then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
CONFIGURATION
MEDIA ALERT
3. Press [SELECT] and then press [↑] or [↓] until you see the command you
are changing, such as in the example shown below:
MEDIA ALERT
MEDIA LENGTH
5-15
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows the current setting with an asterisk (*).
5. Press [↑] or [↓] to change the setting and then press [ENTER] to move the
asterisk (*) to the new setting.
6. Press [MENU]. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
MEDIA ALERT
SET WARNING
7. Press [SELECT] and then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
SET WARNING
ENABLED
About Configuration Test Labels
To review your printer’s current configuration, you can print a Configuration
Test Label that shows either the user-defined software or hardware
configuration of your printer.
User-Defined
This label lists current configuration parameters that are set from the
Configuration, Operator and Install menus, as well as defined pages, formats,
graphics, and fonts. Any installed options also appear on this label.
Hardware
This label shows the amount of memory installed in your printer (static,
expanded, and dynamic RAM), the width and dot size of the printhead,
whether an I/O option card is installed, and the printhead mileage. The
printhead mileage consists of both the amount of media that has been
processed (passed underneath the printhead) and the amount of media that
has been burned (printed on).
5-16
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Configuring the Printer
5
Printing a Configuration Test Label
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display.
2. Press [MENU] and then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
SERVICE MENU
3. Press [SELECT] to enter the Service menu. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the
display shows:
SERVICE MENU
PRINT CONFIG
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
PRINT CONFIG
USER DEFINED
5. Press [↑] or [↓] to scroll from the user-defined label to the Hardware label.
Press [SELECT] when the display shows the label you want to print.
6. The display shows EXECUTE TEST. Press [ENTER] to print the
Configuration Test Label. Both types of labels are shown on the next page.
Note: For 4400 printers with a 6.5 mil printhead, the Label Width is 672 dots, and the
dot size is 6.5 mil.
5-17
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
4400 Configuration Test Labels
Pages Defined : 0
Program Version: 1.3.1
LABEL STOCK - Inter-label gap
LABEL WIDTH - 896 dots
HEAD PRESSURE - Low
IMAGE BANDS - 3
PRINT SPEED - 3.5 IPS
LABEL RETRACT - Enabled
UNITS - Inches
EMULATION - Disabled
SET WARNING - Disabled
Y FORMS ADJUST - 0
CUTTER - Disabled
POWER-ON - Online
25
AUDIBLE ALARM - Disabled DARK ADJUST - 0
CHARACTERSET - US ASCII
LABEL REST POINT - 0
ASCII ZERO - Not Slashed X FORMS ADJUST-O
TRANSLATION - Disabled
SENSITIVITY - 420
SELF STRIP - Disabled
PRTHEAD RANGE - -45% to 45%
PRTHD TEST WARN - Continue
EXTERNAL OPTIONS - none
INTERNAL OPTIONS - none
DEVICE ADDRESS - A
PROTOCOL - Standard
STOP BITS - 1
MESSAGE LENGTH - 255
DATA BITS - 7
BAUD RATE - 9600
PARITY - Even
MEDIA TYPE - Direct Thermal
Fonts Defined: 0,1,2,7,20,21,22,23,24, MAX LABEL LENGTH - 5 inches
Formats Defined : 0
MEDIA LENGTH - 0 inches
Graphics Defined : none
LOW MEDIA WARN - 0 inches
Hardware Configuration
Memory Installed
Static RAM: 39 kilobytes
Expanded RAM:
none
Dynamic RAM: 370 kilobytes
Inches Processed : 0
Inches Burned
: 0
Width
: 896 dots
Dot Size: 5.0 mil
I/O Option Card: none
Printhead
Mileage
4400G.009
SECURITY - Level 0
5-18
User Defined Configuration Label
Hardware Configuration Label
INTERMEC 4400 Printer
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Configuring the Printer
5
Restoring Printer Default Configuration
To return the 4400 printer to its default configuration settings, follow the
“Memory Reset” procedure outlined below. A complete table of the default
settings follows on the next page.
Memory Reset
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display.
2. Press [MENU]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
SERVICE MENU
3. Press [↑] until the display shows:
SERVICE MENU
MEMORY RESET
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
MEMORY RESET
ALL
5. Press [↓] until the display shows:
MEMORY RESET
CONFIGURATION
6. Press [ENTER] to reset the configuration settings.
Note: After using Memory Reset to restore the printer default configuration, you must
reinstall the software drivers for options such as the Cutter or Self-Strip. Memory
Reset also resets all parameters to their default settings, as listed in the table following
this procedure. Sensitivity will be set at 420. See Chapter 8 for procedures on
reinstalling the options’ software drivers.
5-19
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Factory Default Settings
After you complete the preceding procedure on restoring the factory default
settings with the Memory Reset command, your configuration parameters
match the ones shown in the table below:
Command
Factory Setting
Command
Factory Setting
ASCII Zero
Not Slashed
Max Label Length
5 Inches
Audible Alarm
Disabled
Max Print Speed
6 ips
Baud Rate
9600
Media Length
0
Character Set
US ASCII
Media Type
Direct Thermal
Cutter*
Disabled
Message Length
255
Dark Adjust
0
Parity
Even
Data Bits
7
Power-On
Online
Device Address
A
Print Speed
3.5 ips
Emulation
Disabled
Printhead Test
Warn - Continue
External Options
None
Printhead Range
-45% to +45%
Forms Adjust
0
Protocol
Standard
Head Pressure
Low
Ribbon Save
Disabled
Image Bands
3
Security
Level 0
Internal Options
None
Self-Strip*
Disabled
Label Rest Point
0
Sensitivity
420
Label Retract
Enabled
Set Warning
Disabled
Label Stock
Gap
Stop Bits
1
Label Width
4400: 896 dots (4.40
inches)
Translation
Disabled
4400 with 6.5 mil
printhead: 672 dots (3.30
inches)
Units
Inches
0
X Forms Adjust
0
Y Forms Adjust
0
Low Media Warn
*If the optional software drivers are installed at the factory, they are set to Enabled. See “Installing Options”
in Chapter 8.
5-20
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Configuring the Printer
5
Replacing an 8636/46 Printer With a 4400 Printer
If you are replacing an Intermec 8636 or 8646 printer, you can retain your
existing network, hardware, software, and label formats and continue to
produce labels on the 4400 printer that are identical to those produced on the
8636 or 8646 printer. You may want to eventually change your label formats,
network, and software to take advantage of the 4400’s advanced capabilities,
but until then you can easily emulate the 8636 or 8646 printer.
Note: If you have a 4400 printer with a 6.5 mil printhead, Emulation mode simulates
an Intermec 8637 or 8638 printer. The procedures are the same as for the normal 4400,
but the print dimensions are different. Differences are noted throughout the manual
where applicable.
Before you replace the 86XX printer, print out a User-Defined Configuration
Test Label for a copy of the 4400’s current settings. The procedure is discussed
in “Printing a Configuration Test Label” earlier in this chapter.
To replace the 8636/46 printer
1. Upload label formats, fonts, and graphics from the 8636 or 8646 printer to
the host computer.
2. Unplug the 8636 or 8646 printer and install the 4400 printer (see
Chapter 2).
3. Enable 86XX emulation (see “Changing the Basic Configuration Settings”
earlier in this chapter).
4. Download the 86XX formats, fonts, and graphics from the host to the 4400.
About the Emulation Settings
The Emulation settings in the Basic Configuration are described in the
following table.
Setting
Description
86XX
10 mil
The printer emulates an 8636 or 8646 printer printing multiples of
5 mil (0.005 inch) drag and 10 mil (0.01 inch) picket bar codes.
86XX
15 mil
The printer emulates an 8636 or 8646 printer printing multiples of
10 mil (0.01 inch) drag and 15 mil (0.015 inch) picket bar codes.
Disabled
(Default)
The printer uses the 4400 command set and prints in multiples of
5 mil (0.005 inch) drag and 10 mil (0.01 inch) for picket bar codes.
If you have a 4400 printer with a 6.5 mil printhead, printing is in
multiples of 6.5 mil (0.0065 inch) drag and picket bar codes.
5-21
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Printing in Emulation Mode
In Emulation mode, the 4400 uses a subset of its command set to let you print
labels identical to those produced on an 86XX printer. There are some
operational and programming differences between an 86XX printer and 86XX
emulation on the 4400 printer. The differences are noted in the following table.
Note: In 4400 printers with a 6.5 mil printhead, Emulation mode simulates an
Intermec 8637 or 8638 printer. The procedures are the same as for the 4400, but the
print dimensions are different. Differences are noted where applicable.
Printing in Emulation Mode
Feature
8636 or 8646 Printer
4400 Printer in Emulation Mode
Format Error
Sends a <BEL> character
(error code) back to the host
and does not try to execute
the command or print a label.
Does not send a <BEL> character (error code) back
to the host. The printer attempts to execute the
command and print a label by substituting the
printer default settings for the invalid syntax.
Displays syntax error message.
Certain erroneous commands generate error codes
that are stored in the printer. When the host sends
a <BEL> character to the printer, the printer
transmits the most recent error code to the host.
Range Errors
Does not attempt to print a
label unless the label format
definitions fit within the
media boundaries.
Attempts to print a label even if the image runs
onto the next label. If this happens, the printer
skips the rest of the overrun label.
User-Defined
Protocol
Supports the capability for
users to define their own
communications protocol.
Has limited user-defined protocol. You can
redefine protocol characters by substituting one
character for another, but you cannot change the
rules of a given protocol.
Auto-Transmit
Commands
No Auto-Transmit 3
command.
Supports the Auto-Transmit 3 command.
Configuration (SI)
Commands
No SI configuration
commands.
A new set of SI configuration commands added to
the command set.
Format Storage
5.5K bytes
40K bytes
Number of
Formats
10
20
Fields per Format
100
200
Field Data Buffer
50 bytes
200 bytes
Number of
Graphics (UDCs)
10
100
5-22
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Configuring the Printer
5
Printing in Emulation Mode (continued)
Feature
8636 or 8646 Printer
4400 Printer in Emulation Mode
Number of Userdefined Fonts
7
17
Maximum
Graphic Size
3 square inches
3 square inches but prints if graphic exceeds
maximum length.
Breach Printing
(Enhanced
Stepping Speed)
available
not available
8100 (Polling
Mode C) Protocol
available
not available
Outline Fonts
not available
Prints outline fonts that are downloaded.
Page Formatting
Commands
not available
available
Specify Font Size
Specify height and width
only.
Same as for an 8636 or 8646 printer.
International
Characters
Different character sets are
preceded by <SUB>
characters.
Same as for an 8636 or 8646 printer.
Downloading
Bitmap Graphics
Bitmap graphics are
downloaded at one bit per
byte.
Same as for an 8636 or 8646 printer.
Print Resolution
10 mil (0.010 inch) dots, or 15
mil (0.015 inch) dots
(13 mil, or 0.013 inch, dots for
4400 users with a 6.5 mil
printhead)
Same as for an 8636 or 8646 printer.
5-23
6
Designing Labels and Using Commands
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
This chapter describes how to use the printer’s command set when designing labels.
In addition, there are several examples of label formats containing different field
types.
Introduction to Label Design
The 4400 printer is designed to print labels in formats consisting of fields that
may contain lines, boxes, graphics, bar codes, and text in many orientations.
You can use the printer to design labels that are easy to read, contain accurate
information, and conserve media by using space efficiently.
If you have never designed labels before, it may take some practice to design
ones that meet all your requirements.
An alternative to using the command set and downloading formats with
communications programs is Intermec’s PrintSet, described later in this
chapter.
Label Formats
Before printing a label, you must specify a label format and send data to fill in
the designated fields in the format. The format defines where and how the data
appears on the label. A label format is composed of several different fields that
contain dimensions and terms used to map the information printed on a label.
For example, if you want to print a number on a label, the format indicates the
location, font, size, and orientation of the number.
Note: Whenever a format is created, a human-readable field zero (H0) is automatically
created along with it. It is created with all field parameters at default and can be deleted
only after one or more fields are created.
An example of a simple label format accompanied by sample data is shown on
the following page.
This example shows how format and data strings appear before being
downloaded. The mnemonics represent control codes (such as <STX> for start
of message). These mnemonics can be translated into hex or ASCII control
characters using the table in the Appendix. The line breaks are to make the
program easier to read and do not represent carriage returns.
Sample Format
<STX><ESC>c<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E4;F4;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o120,50;f0;c2;h2;w1;d0,30;<ETX>
<STX>B1;o120,220;c0,1;h50;w1;i0;d0,11;[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
6-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Sample Data
<STX><ESC>E4<ETX>
<STX><CAN><ETX>
<STX>THIS IS THE SIMPLE SAMPLE<CR><ETX>
<STX>SAMPLE<ETX>
<STX><ETB><ETX>
Label Printed With Sample Format and Data
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
4400-73
Communicating With the Printer
To send a label format to the 4400, you must go through a process called
downloading. Downloading is the universal term that describes the transfer of
information from a computer to any connected peripheral device (a printer, a
reader, etc.). Uploading describes the transfer of data from your printer to your
PC or host.
There are several ways to download information. You can either download
from a terminal on your host or from a PC. Many different methods may be
used from either platform.
6-4
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
Using the PrintSet Software
Use the PrintSet application software to easily configure your printer from your
PC. You can upload the current configuration settings, modify them, and then
download them to the 4400 printer. PrintSet also lets you:
•
download graphics and fonts (including TrueType).
•
print test labels.
•
allocate memory.
•
download configuration files.
For help using PrintSet, refer to the online helpportion of the application software.
Using the Printer Command Set
If you are not using PrintSet, you can create labels by downloading formats
and data created with the printer command set. See Chapter 7 for a complete
list of commands and their descriptions. The example on the previous page
uses several commands from the printer command set.
The commands in the printer command set can perform many functions and
activate any feature of the 4400 printer. The method you use to download the
commands is up to you. If you do not use PrintSet, try some of the options
listed on the following pages.
Downloading Commands Using DOS
To download commands using DOS, you must connect the printer to the serial
port on your PC using the correct Intermec cable (see Chapter 2). Next,
configure the serial port using the DOS Mode command. From the DOS
prompt, type in a command similar to the following (replace COM1: with the
serial port used):
C:\MODE COM1: 96,E,7,1,N
The DOS Copy or Print commands commonly use the hardware flow control
(Ready/Busy) communication protocol. To use this protocol, the printer must
be in Ready/Busy mode (which is the factory default configuration).
Note: If you do not set the hardware flow control protocol, the file you want to
download must be less than the input buffer of the printer (2K). However, you can use
the DOS Copy or Print commands for large files if you enable hardware flow control by
configuring the printer for XON/XOFF protocol and make the proper pin connections.
Enter the commands into a text file using a text editor or a word processor.
Make sure that you save the file as an ASCII text file. See your DOS user’s
manual for more information.
6-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Send the file to the printer using the following DOS commands:
COPY (filename) COM1:
PRINT (filename):
where filename is the name of your text file. The copy command copies the file
to serial port 1 (COM1) of your PC. The print command sends your text file to
LPT1 (unless redirected).
Using the DOS Copy command you can create files that you can store on your
PC, and then modify and download them several times. For example, if your
first attempt at a label format does not work, you can return to the text editor
and change the commands, and then download the format again. By using this
method, you eliminate the need to retype command strings that you decide to
change.
For an example of how to use a word processor to recreate ASCII characters,
here is the same label format shown in two different ways.
Sample Format
<STX><ESC>c<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E3;F3;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o120,50;f0;c0;h2;w1;d0,30;<ETX>
<STX>B1;o170,220;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;i0;d0,11;[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
Keystrokes to Enter Sample Format From a Word Processor
Alt-02
Alt-02
Alt-02
Alt-02
Alt-02
Alt-02
Alt-27 c Alt-03
Alt-27 P Alt-03
E3;F3; Alt-03
H0;o120,50;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;i0;d0,11;[email protected];Alt-03
B1;o170,220;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;i0;d0,11;[email protected];Alt-03
R Alt-03
Note: When ASCII decimal equivalents are entered in a word processor, they are
displayed on the screen as characters.
Downloading Commands Using Readable Protocol/Command Characters
If it is difficult for you to edit or transmit command files containing control
characters, you may want to utilize the new readable protocol/command
characters feature. To use the readable characters feature, type the ASCII
characters in as a string. Angle brackets around ASCII strings are used to
represent these characters. For example, if you want to enter the ASCII
mnemonic for Start of Text, type the control character out as a readable
character string <STX>. The printer automatically detects whether you are
using control characters or readable protocol/command characters by the start
of text (<STX>) character.
6-6
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
All characters in a message must be in the same form as the start of text
(<STX>) character. For example, if you include control characters in a message
that begins with the readable protocol/command character <STX>, they are
thrown away. Using readable characters may consume more space and time,
but it has the distinct advantage of displaying everything on the screen in
readable characters.
Downloading Commands Using PC Communications Programs or Host
Terminals
Other ways to download commands to your printer are through a PC
communications program, a terminal emulation program, or from a host
terminal. In any of these situations, the commands you enter through the
keyboard will be sent immediately to the printer in real time. The only
drawback of using these programs is that mistakes are sent to the printer in
real time as well. If you make an error while entering commands, you must
retype the command string.
This inconvenience can be overcome for the most part by keeping your
command strings short. Design your formats as combinations of many short
command strings rather than in one long string.
The following examples demonstrate two ways a format can be downloaded
using PC communications programs.
Breaking the Format Into Separate Lines
This example shows the format divided into separate lines, each of which starts
with the <STX> (start of message) command and ends with the <ETX> (end of
message) command. When the printer receives the <ETX> command, it returns
a positive or negative response, depending on whether it received a valid
message. Since an <ETX> follows each line, only one line needs to be retyped if
the printer detects a mistake.
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E3;F3;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o81,100;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>H1;o81,120;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>H2;o81,150;f0;c2;d0,14;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>H3;o81,190;f0;c2;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>B4;o81,0;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;d0,11;i0;[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
6-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Sending One Long String of Commands
This next example shows the same format typed as one long string of
commands, using the <STX> and <ETX> characters only at the beginning and
end of the entire format. This method calls for fewer keystrokes, but if you
make a mistake anywhere, you must retype the entire format.
<STX><ESC>P;E3;F3;H0;o81,100;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;H1;o81,120;f0;c0;
d0,16;h1;w1;H2;o81,150;f0;c2;d0,14;h1;w1;H3;o81,190;f0;c2;d0,16;
h1;w1;B4;o81,0;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;d0,11;i0;[email protected];R<ETX>
Using ASCII Control Characters
With many communications or terminal emulation software, you create the
commands by using the equivalent ASCII control characters. For example,
<ETX> is entered as Ctrl-C. A table listing the ASCII control characters is
located in the Appendix.
The following example is the format shown earlier with the command
mnemonics replaced by ASCII control characters. Hold down the Ctrl key on
your keyboard and type the letter as shown to create the printer command.
Ctrl-B
Ctrl-B
Ctrl-B
Ctrl-B
Ctrl-B
Ctrl-B
Ctrl-B
Ctrl-B
<ESC>P Ctrl-C
E3;F3; Ctrl-C
H0;o81,100;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1; Ctrl-C
H1;o81,120;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1; Ctrl-C
H2;o81,150;f0;c2;d0,14;h1;w1; Ctrl-C
H3;o81,190;f0;c2;d0,16;h1;w1; Ctrl-C
B4;o81,0;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;d0,11;i0;[email protected]; Ctrl-C
R Ctrl-C
Switching Between Print Mode and Program Mode
Before you download information to the printer, you must be in the correct
operating mode. Download printer commands in either Print mode or Program
mode as follows:
•
Use Program mode to define formats, pages, fonts, and characters.
The command to enter Program mode is:
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
To ensure correct downloading, you may want to send this command every
time you download formats, even if you think the printer is already in
Program mode. If the printer is in Program mode, this command is
ignored.
6-8
HelvC NugFont
•
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
Use Print mode to download data and print labels.
The command to enter Print mode is:
<STX>R<ETX>
This command can be entered before each set of data or at the end of every
format. If the printer is in Print mode already, this command is ignored.
Note: Besides being used to pass data, Print mode is also used to download
configuration commands that are used for setting certain printer features to your
specifications and for enabling options. For example, you use configuration
commands to emulate an Intermec 8636 or 8646 printer or to change the character
set.
Understanding Label Design Components
Label formats are combinations of several different fields that determine where
and how different types of data appear in the label design. The fields on a label
may differ in size, location, orientation, and data type. Once the fields in a
format are defined, data can be passed into the fields and then printed.
A field is defined to hold a certain data type. You can define bar code fields,
human-readable fields, graphic fields, lines, boxes, or interpretive fields. You
must define the data you plan to print on your label as a field in the label
format.
The fields on your label can differ both in the data and in the way the data is
displayed. For example, your label could show one number printed as a bar
code and a different number printed in large black letters. The bar code field is
a different kind of field than the large black lettered field.
Each field type gives you options on how you want your data to be interpreted.
Most of the options are in bar code fields (what type of bar code) and humanreadable fields.
6-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Bar Code Fields
You can print bar codes in any of the symbologies listed below. A full
description of each bar code symbology can be found in the Appendix.
Symbology
Characters per Inch
Code 39
7.00
Code 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5
12.69
Codabar
9.23
Code 128
18.46
Code 93
11.28
UPC/EAN
14.50
Code 49
49.0*
Code 16K
37.0*
Code 11
11.28
Code One†
PDF 417†
Maxicode†
*0.719 inches high by 0.690 inches wide, 8 rows
†2D symbologies have variable sizes. See the Appendix for details.
Character Fields and Fonts
Human-readable fields can be printed in any one of the printer’s internal fonts.
These fonts can be resized or rotated by using the appropriate commands.
There are two kinds of fonts available in the printer, bitmap or outline fonts.
Bitmapfonts distort much easier when they are magnified. Outline fonts, rather
than being defined as a matrix of dots and blanks, are defined by vectors and
curves and hold their smooth shape better when enlarged. You may want to
keep this in mind for scaling purposes.
The following figure shows the difference between enlarged outline and
bitmap fonts.
The printer contains the following internal fonts. The following figures show
the fonts listed next to the corresponding command, in numerical order. The
font set includes:
6-10
•
Four standard bitmap fonts measured in dot sizes (5x7, 7x9, 7x11, and
10x14).
•
Six standard bitmap fonts measured in point sizes (8, 10, 12, 16, 20, and 24).
•
Nine bold bitmap fonts in point sizes (6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 30, and 36).
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
•
Two bitmap fonts that can be recognized by optical character recognition
(OCR) programs.
•
One smooth scaleable outline font from Bitstream Typeface Packages for
the PC.
c20 8 POINT FONT
c21 12 POINT FONT
c22 20 POINT FONT
c24 OCR FONT B
c25- SMOOTH SCALABLE FONT
6-11
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Printer Internal Fonts c30 through c41
4400U.099
User-Defined Fonts
In addition to the permanent fonts in your printer, you can also download
user-defined (fixed) fonts. Bitmap fonts commonly:
6-12
•
print in one fixed size.
•
print quickly.
•
are memory intensive when defined as large characters.
•
consume less memory when defined as small characters.
•
are widely available with Windows and PrintSet.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
Downloading User-Defined Fonts
You can download user-defined fonts (UDFs) to the 4400 printer and store
them in non-volatile memory. Although the printer reserves 16 font ID
numbers, 3 to 6, an d8 to 19) for UDFs, memory constraints may limit the
number of fonts you can store.
Intermec’s PrintSet software provides the easiest way to download fonts to the
printer form a PC. If you do not have your 4400 printer connected to a PC, you
can use PrintSet to create a *.PCF file for downloading at a later time. You can
also use IPL commands to edit the *.PCF files.
If you have not done so, install the PrintSet disk provided with this guide.
PrintSet uses a standard Windows user interface and includes online help.
Refer to the online help for specific instructions on using PrintSet.
Downloading Bitmap Fonts
Use PrintSet to select and download bitmap fonts.
Bitmap fonts can be memory intensive. You can use PrintSet to define a subset
of that font (such as only the number). Then you can download that subset and
save storage space on the printer.
The 4400 printer accepts two formats for bitmap fonts: 1 bit per byte, or 6 bits
per byte. PrintSet automatically converts all bitmap fonts to the 6 bits per byte
format.
Lines and Boxes
You can use the command set to define fields that appear as lines or as boxes
when you print your label. Use the rotation commands to determine whether a
line or box will appear vertically or horizontally and the height and width
commands to set the length and thickness of the lines.
The following figure shows a label where vertical and horizontal lines are used
to separate data types and make the label easier to read.
6-13
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Lines and Boxes Separating Data on a Label
SHIPPING LABEL
BASIS WT. 39-4838
GRADE DESCRIPTION
38448379237
ROLL WIDTH
536-0333
A - PLUS QTY
ROLLS/PKG.
338438
12
CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER
372181192
ORDER ITEM NUMBER
234 - LOFT
LOCATION-PACKAGE NUMBER-GRADE
3839494
WEIGHT
230
LOAD NUMBER OR TRACKING NUMBER
ROLL NUMBER
3392-AZ
37282833 400
*INTERMEC*
*INTERMEC*
INTERMEC
ROLL POSITION
*372181192*
*372181192*
372181192
3400-72
Graphics
A graphic field is used to print a graphic. Before you can use this field you
must download the graphic to the printer. Once the graphic is downloaded,
you can call it up and print it just like any letter or bar code image.
To get a graphic into a format that can be understood by the printer, you must
send it as either a one bit per byte or six bits per byte bitmap image.
One Bit Per Byte
One bit per byte is the standard graphics format used for downloading to an
Intermec 8636 or 8646 printer. A one bit per byte bitmap image is an
arrangement of ones and zeros that can look similar to the following example
(but usually larger).
6-14
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
00000000100000000
00000001110000000
00000010111000000
00000100111100000
00001000111110000
00010000111111000
00100000111111100
01000000111111110
00100000100000100
00010000100001000
00001000100010000
00000100100100000
00000010101000000
00000001110000000
00000000100000000
If you look closely at the bitmap file above, you can see that it is the outline of a
diamond with a line down the middle, and the upper right corner blacked in.
You can create your own graphic by drawing it on graph paper and then
converting each of the squares to either a one or a zero, and typing it into a text
file column by column. When you send the file to the printer, a character in the
file represents either a dot or a blank when the image is printed. (The zeros are
blanks and the ones are dots.)
To download a one bit per byte user-defined image to the printer, you must
use the correct protocol characters and define the bitmap as a user-defined
image. The 4400 printer must also be operating in 8636/46 emulation mode.
The following example is the same bitmap shown above, but it now includes
the commands needed to download it to the printer. The ones and zeros are
now listed one vertical column at a time. The graphic is given the number G3,
the name DIAM, the dimensions 15 rows by 15 columns, and each column is
assigned a number between u0 and u14 (it looks as if the rows are assigned
numbers, but they become the columns as explained below).
<STX><ESC>c<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>G3,diam;x15;y15;<ETX>
<STX>u0,000000010000000;<ETX>
<STX>u1,000000101000000;<ETX>
<STX>u2,000001000100000;<ETX>
<STX>u3,000010000010000;<ETX>
<STX>u4,000100000001000;<ETX>
<STX>u5,001000000000100;<ETX>
<STX>u6,010000000000010;<ETX>
<STX>u7,111111111111111;<ETX>
<STX>u8,011111110000010;<ETX>
<STX>u9,001111110000100;<ETX>
<STX>u10,000111110001000;<ETX>
<STX>u11,000011110010000;<ETX>
6-15
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Example (continued)
<STX>u12,000001110100000;<ETX>
<STX>u13,000000111000000;<ETX>
<STX>u14,000000010000000;<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
When you download a bitmap, the rows become the columns, and the
beginning of the last row becomes the top of the last column. For an example,
study the bitmap above and then look at the following printout.
It is important to remember that the bitmap is defined in terms of columns
rather than rows.
Here is what the graphic looks like when incorporated into a format, enlarged,
and then printed.
4400-77
Six Bits Per Byte
Six bits per byte format is more compact than one bit per byte. When you use
six bits per byte, you can download large graphics more quickly with the
printer in 4400 mode rather than Emulation mode.
The arrangement of the bits is very important in this format. Every byte is
composed of eight bits (0 through 7), but only bits 0 through 5 are used to map
the image.
Bit 6 (the 7th bit) must always be set to 1 so data can be downloaded to the
printer. Bit 7 (the 8th bit) is reserved for parity and compatibility on 7-bit hosts.
6-16
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
Graphics like the previous one bit per byte (diamond) bitmap example, can be
downloaded in six bits per byte format.
To create a six bits per byte format
1. Draw the graphic on graph paper.
2. Change the graph paper drawing into a pattern of ones and zeros.
3. Starting from the top row, divide each vertical column into groups of six
digits. (If the bottom group has less than 6 digits, add zeros to this group
until it also has six.) The six digits in each group are the six bits that will be
downloaded in a byte of data. The top digit of each group is bit 0, the
bottom digit is bit 5.
4. Add a 1 in the bit 6 position, and then add a 0 in the bit 7 position so that
each group now has eight digits. (Eight digits complete the byte.)
5. Reverse the order of each group so that bit 0 is now last and bit 7 is first.
Each eight-digit group is now a binary representation of an ASCII
character.
6. Translate each eight-digit group into an ASCII character according to the
chart in the Appendix, and the method you choose to download the data.
7. Make sure the printer is in 4400 mode and not in Emulation mode.
8. Download the graphic so that each column is represented by a command
string.
Here is the same diamond shape graphic shown earlier, but this time it is in six
bits per byte format with ASCII characters.
<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>G2,diam;x15;y15;<ETX>
<STX>u0,@[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>u1,@[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>u2,`[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>u3,[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>u4,H`@;<ETX>
<STX>u5,[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>u6,[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>u7,<DEL><DEL>G;<ETX>
<STX>u8,~CB;<ETX>
<STX>u9,|CA;<ETX>
<STX>u10,[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>u11,[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>u12,`[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>u13,@[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>u14,@[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
6-17
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Working With Fields
Now that you have learned about the different types of fields printable with the
4400 printer, you need to know how to arrange them to define or change the
format of a label. The following part of the chapter uses examples to describe
the commands that position, size, rotate, and edit label formats. A complete list
of all programming commands is given in Chapter 7.
Editing Fields
If you make a mistake in a label format, you may not have to redownload the
entire format (depending on the severity of the mistake). You can change a
specific field in a format by sending a command in Program mode.
The printer uses a field pointer to point to the field that is to be modified when
the printer is in Program mode. The pointer continues to point to the most
recently selected field until a different format or field is selected.
The following format is used as an example. Assume you want to change field
3 (which is defined by the third line from the bottom) from h1;w1; to h2;w2;:
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E3;F3;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o81,100;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>H1;o81,120;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>H2;o81,150;f0;c2;d0,14;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>H3;o81,190;f0;c2;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX>
<STX>B4;o81,0;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;d0,11;i0;[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
Download the following command:
<STX><ESC>P;F3;H3;h2;w2;R<ETX>
Each command in this string is described below:
Command
Description
<ESC>P
Enter Program mode
F3;
Access format number 3 from memory
H3;
Access field 3
h2;
Set the height to 2
w2;
Set the width to 2
R
Return to Print mode
Note: The <STX> and <ETX> commands mark the beginning and end of a message.
The semicolon (;) is the command terminator. All commands in Program mode must
end with this terminator except the last command in a message.
6-18
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
Deleting Fields
You can delete a field from a label format entirely. However, you cannot delete
the last field in a format.
For example, you cannot delete field 0 from a format that has no other fields.
When a format is created, human-readable field zero (H0) is automatically
created along with it. If you want to delete field 0 from a format, define field 1,
and then delete field 0.
The following command string can be used to delete field x from format y.
<STX><ESC>P;Fy;Dx;R<ETX>
Each command in this string is described below:
Command
Description
<ESC>P
Enter Program mode
Fy;
Access format y
Dx;
Delete field x
R
Return to Print mode
Scaling Fields
The size of a field is determined by the size of either the font or graphic you use
and the field magnification factors you apply. The human-readable and bar
code fonts have default sizes, and the user-defined character fields will print as
large as you design them, but by using magnification commands, you can scale
them to be up to 4 inches by 4 inches.
Magnifying Fonts and Character Fields
The internal fonts in the printer already have sizes associated with them. For
example, the letters in font c0 are 7 dots wide by 9 dots high, and there is a onedot gap between characters. If you design a field that will print 10 letters in font
c0, the field will be 79 dots wide by 9 dots high.
By applying magnification factors (h for height and w for width) you can
increase a field’s height or width. If you increased the height to 2 (h2) for the
field described above, the field height would double, and the final field would
print 79 dots long by 18 dots high. If you changed the magnification to h3, the
field height would triple, and the field would print 79 dots by 27 dots.
Increasing the width of a text field to 2 would make each letter in the field
twice as wide. If this was done to the example above, with field height h2, the
final field would print 158 dots wide by 18 dots high.
6-19
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Magnifying Bar Code Fields
Bar code fields may also be magnified using the height and width commands,
but the commands do not behave the same as with human-readable fields.
For bar code fields, the height magnification is the actual dot height of the bar
code. If you choose a height magnification of h20, the height of the bar code
field will be 20 dots.
Printing narrow bar codes conserves space on each label as well as media. If
you plan to scan bar codes from a distance, you may need to magnify the bar
code widths.
The width magnification factor for bar code fields refers to the width of the
narrowest element of the bar code. The minimum bar code width is 5 mil (in
drag mode). When you specify a narrow element width of w3, the width of the
narrowest element in the symbology will be three dots wide. The spaces and
large element widths will grow according to preset ratios for each symbology.
The default height for bar code fields is 50 dots, and the default width for
narrow elements is 1 dot. You can magnify bar code fields to print up to 9999
dots high, with a narrow element of up to 9999 dots wide, but you will need
special equipment to scan a bar code that wide.
Positioning Fields
Positioning fields using downloaded commands may be the trickiest part of
designing labels. Since you cannot tell exactly how the field will look until it
prints, you may need to make several test prints before you get the field
positioned exactly right.
➤
Direction of media from printer
D
A
HR Field
Second HR Field
B
*BCFIELD*
*BC FIELD*
C
A = 10,10
B = 10,100
6-20
C = 10,150
D = 195,10
4400-70
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
For all types of fields, the print position is determined by defining the
coordinates of the upper left corner of the unrotated field.
The upper left corner of an unrotated field is referred to as the field origin. To
define the coordinates of the field origin, you use the origin command
(oxxx,yyy) where o is the command that specifies origin, xxx is the distance
from the left side of the label, and yyy is the distance from the top of the label.
The xxx and yyy coordinates of the field origin are measured in dots. There are
203.2 dots per inch, or 8 dots per millimeter.
For example, to position a field to print one inch from the top of your label and
approximately 1/2 inch from the left side, the origin command would be
o101,203.
Note: If you are operating your printer in 86XX emulation mode, the dot sizes will
double in 10 mil mode and increase by 1.5 in 15 mil mode.
To position a field which uses font c20, c21, c22, c23, c24, or c25 (the outline
font), you must make an extra calculation. Where the origin of a bar code field,
bitmap text field, line, box, or graphic is easy to determine, the outline font will
seem to print below the field origin. This occurs because the outline font
contains special characters that are actually larger than uppercase letters.
These special characters require extra space between the top of the outline font
uppercase letters and the origin of the field. If you are not using the special
characters, but are trying to position an outline font field, set the yyy
coordinate a little higher than you would for a different field.
Rotating Fields
Any type of field you print can be rotated in increments of 90 degrees
counterclockwise around the field origin.
To position a rotated field, you should keep in mind that the field origin will
remain on the corner where it was before the field was rotated. If a field is
rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, the origin (which used to be at the upper
left corner but is now at the lower left corner) is still the origin.
•
For fields that are rotated 90 degrees, you must position the lower left
corner of the rotated field.
•
For fields that are rotated 180 degrees, you must position the lower right
corner of the rotated field.
•
For fields that are rotated 270 degrees, you must position the upper right
corner of the rotated field.
6-21
*
*4400*
fØ
*4400*
*
f3
f1
*
*4400*
f2
*
*4400*
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
* = Field Origin
4400-71
Storing Label Formats
When a label is defined, either by downloading printer commands or by using
PrintSet or a similar program, the format is stored in the printer’s RAM.
Once a label is stored in the printer, it can be used at any time. You can call it
up to print labels with, or you call it up in Program mode to modify one or all
of the fields.
Designing Pages
A page is a collection of one or more formats that are combined to print at the
same time. This is very practical in cases where you may need to attach several
different labels on each one of your objects. For example, you may need to
attach one kind of label to a product, and a different label to its container. With
the printer’s page printing capability, you can print both labels at the same
time. Being able to print pages of several formats at once also allows you to
print labels on media rolls that have different sizes and shapes of labels already
precut.
When you group label formats into a page, the formats are put in positions that
are assigned the letters a through z. Formats combined in pages may still be
printed independently.
6-22
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
Using Printer Memory
There is enough RAM in the printer to store several different label formats and
still retain enough memory to store downloaded fonts, graphics, and data. Be
careful of how you use your printer memory. There is a limit to how much can
be stored in the printer.
In its base configuration, the printer is equipped with 39K of static RAM. You
may expand the available RAM to 295K by installing a RAM expansion board.
There are limits to the number of formats, fonts, graphics, or pages that you
can store in the printer. You can define up to 16 soft fonts, but there may not be
enough room depending on the amount of memory being used for other
purposes. The more formats, graphics, and fonts you store, the less memory is
available.
When you run into a memory usage problem, use the <ESC>m command to
see how much memory remains available. If you find that it is necessary to
increase your available memory, you can do one of the following:
•
Use one of the Service Memory Reset menus to increase the amount of
available memory in part or all of the sections. See “Increasing Available
Memory” in Chapter 9 for more information.
•
The commands used to create a font or graphic can be used to delete them
as well (see the Program mode commands in Chapter 7):
Outline fonts: Jn without any following data will delete outline font n.
Bitmap fonts: Tn without any following data will delete bitmap font n.
UDCs: Gn without any following data will delete UDC n.
•
Use the Program commands (see Chapter 7) to delete pages and formats:
Pages: Delete a page with the sn command.
Formats: Erase format n by using the En command.
Format Examples
Label formats (designs) incorporate the different types of fields that were
previously described. Following are some practical examples of label designs.
6-23
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Example 1
The first example is a fairly simple label designed to demonstrate the different
types of data that can be printed.
*3666*
*3666*
4400-78
Format for Example 1
<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E3;F3;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o162,200;f0;c2;d0,16;h2;w2;<ETX>
<STX>H1;o162,300;f0;c2;d3,Warehouse Part #
3666;h2;w2;<ETX>
<STX>B2;o162,400;f0;c0,1;h100;w2;i0;d0,11;[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>L3;o162,530;f0;l600;h2;w6;<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
Data for Example 1
<STX><ESC>E3<CAN><ETX>
<STX>LOC 1246<CR><ETX>
<STX>3666<ETX>
<STX><ETB><ETX>
6-24
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
The <STX> and <ETX> characters mark the beginning and end of each
command string. The semicolon (;) is the command terminator. All commands
in Program mode must end with this terminator except the last command in a
message. The other characters are described in the table below.
Command
Description
<ESC>C
Sets 4400 (advanced) mode.
<ESC>P
Enters Program mode.
E3;
Erases anything previously stored as format three.
F3;
Creates format three.
H0;
Designates field zero as a human-readable field.
o162,200;
Sets the origin at grid coordinates (162,200).
f0;
Sets the field rotation to zero, which is unrotated or horizontal.
c2;
Selects internal font two.
d0,16;
Determines that data is sent during print mode and its maximum length is 16
characters.
h2;
Sets the height magnification factor to twice its original height.
w2;
Sets the field width magnification factor to twice its original width.
H1;
Defines field one as a human-readable field.
o162,300;
Sets the field origin at coordinates (162,300).
f0;
Sets the rotation factor of the field to zero.
c2;
Selects internal font two.
d3,Warehouse
Part # 3666;
Determines that data for the field has this constant value: Warehouse Part # 3666.
h2;
Sets the field height magnification factor to twice its original height.
w2;
Sets the field width magnification factor to twice its original width.
B2;
Defines field two as a bar code field.
o162,400;
Sets the origin at coordinates (162,400).
f0;
Sets the field rotation to zero (unrotated).
c0,1;
Selects Code 39 with a check digit entered by the printer.
h100;
Sets the field height to 100 dots.
6-25
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Example 1 Command Descriptions (continued)
Command
Description
w2;
Sets the narrowest element width to two dots.
i0;
Determines that no human-readable interpretive field prints below the bar code.
d0,11;
Sets data from Print mode at 11 characters long.
[email protected];
Determines the bar code field has no prefix.
L3;
Defines field three as a line field.
o162,530;
Set the field origin at coordinates (162,530).
f0;
Define the field rotation as horizontal.
l600;
Determines the length of the line is 600 dots.
h2;
Sets the height magnification factor to twice its original height.
w6;
Determines the width of the line is six dots.
R
Exits Program mode and enters Print mode.
<ESC>E3
Accesses format three.
<CAN>
Clears all data for the current format and points to the lowest numbered field in the
format that can accept variable data.
LOC 1246<CR>
This is the data for the first field in the format. Moves to the next field
3666
This is the data for the bar code field.
<ETB>
Prints the label.
6-26
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
Example 2
This example is given to demonstrate some of the more complex labels that
you can design with the 4400 printer. This format has fields that include a
graphic, lines, boxes, and several fields with constant data.
Cat.
No.
432-3221
S
i
z
e
3
4
Lot 23455 2629333
1
St.
Qty.
100
DUPLEX ANGLE CONNECTOR
- For Flexible Steel Conduit and .375" - .625"
Diameter Armored and Nonmetallic Sheath Cables
- For Smooth or Interlocking Sheath Metal Clad
Cables .375" - .675" Dia. (UL only)
ACE CORP.
ADDRESS 3010
FICTION USA
*307,91751*
*307 91751*
3400-63
Graphic for Example 2
<STX><ESC>c<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>G2,diam;x15;y15;<ETX>
<STX>u0,000000010000000;<ETX>
<STX>u1,000000101000000;<ETX>
<STX>u2,000001000100000;<ETX>
<STX>u3,000010000010000;<ETX>
<STX>u4,000100000001000;<ETX>
<STX>u5,001000000000100;<ETX>
<STX>u6,010000000000010;<ETX>
<STX>u7,111111111111111;<ETX>
<STX>u8,011111110000010;<ETX>
<STX>u9,001111110000100;<ETX>
<STX>u10,000111110001000;<ETX>
<STX>u11,000011110010000;<ETX>
<STX>u12,000001110100000;<ETX>
<STX>u13,000000111000000;<ETX>
<STX>u14,000000010000000;<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
6-27
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Format for Example 2
<STX><ESC>C<ETX>
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
<STX>E5;F5;<ETX>
<STX>H0;o45,40;c25;d3,Cat.;k10;<ETX>
<STX>H1;o45,70;c25;d3,No.;k10;<ETX>
<STX>H2;o175,0;c25;d3,432-3221;k40;<ETX>
<STX>H3;o795,40;c25;d3,Std.;k10;<ETX>
<STX>H4;o795,70;c25;d3,Qty.;k10;<ETX>
<STX>H5;o925,0;c25;d3,100;k40<ETX>
<STX>L6;o750,10;f3;l130;w8;<ETX>
<STX>L7;o35,140;l1075;w8;<ETX>
<STX>H8;o40,165;c25;f3;r1;d3,Size;k10<ETX>
<STX>H9;o100,130;c25;d3,1 ";k40;<ETX>
<STX>H10;o145,165;f3;r1;c25;d3,3/4;h16;w65;<ETX>
<STX>L11;o310,140;f3;l130;w8;<ETX>
<STX>L12;o35,270;l275;w8;<ETX>
<STX>H13;o60,560;f1;c25;d0,20;k10;<ETX>
<STX>L14;o170,270;f3;l310;w8;<ETX>
<STX>H15;o350,140;c25;d3,DUPLEX ANGLE CONNECTOR;h70;w28;<ETX>
<STX>H16;o205,320;c25;d3,- For Flexible Steel Conduit and .375"
- .625";k12;<ETX>
<STX>H17;o247,375;c25;d3,Diameter Armored and Nonmetalic Sheath
Cables;k12;<ETX>
<STX>H18;o205,450;c25;d3,- For Smooth or Interlocking Sheath
Metal Clad;k12;<ETX>
<STX>H19;o247,505;c25;d3,Cables .375" - .675" Dia. (UL
only);k12;<ETX>
<STX>L20;o35,580;l1075;w8;<ETX>
<STX>U21;o50,610;c2;h9;w9;<ETX>
<STX>H22;o220,600;c25;d3,ACE CORP.;k20;<ETX>
<STX>H23;o220,670;c25;d3,ADDRESS 3010;k10;<ETX>
<STX>H24;o220,710;c25;d3,FICTION USA;k10;<ETX>
<STX>B25;o675,625;c0,0;d0,20;i25;h100;[email protected];<ETX>
<STX>L26;o585,580;f3;l175;w8;<ETX>
<STX>R<ETX>
Data for Example 2
<STX><ESC>E5<CAN><ETX>
<STX>Lot 23455 2629333<CR>307 91751<ETX>
<STX><ETB><ETX>
6-28
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
The <ETX> and <STX> characters are used to mark the beginnings and ends of
the command strings. The other characters are explained in the following table.
Command
Description
<ESC>C
Selects 4400 (advanced) mode.
<ESC>P
Selects Program mode.
E5;F5;
Erases anything previously stored as format five and accesses the location for format
five.
H0;
Defines field zero as a human-readable field.
o45,40;
Sets the origin of field zero at coordinates (45,40).
c25;
Sets the font for field zero to font 25.
d3,Cat.;
Sets the data for field zero to have the constant value: Cat.
k10;
Sets the point size to 10.
H1;
Defines field one as a human-readable field.
o45,70;
Sets the origin of field one at coordinates (45,70).
c25;
Sets the fonts for field one to font 25.
d3,No.;
Set the data for field one the constant value: No.
k10;
Sets the point size to ten.
H2;
Defines field two as a human-readable field.
o175,0;
Sets the origin of field two at (175,0).
c25;
Sets the font of field two to font 25.
d3,432-3221;
Sets the constant data for field two.
k40;
Set the point size to 40.
H3;
Defines field three as a human-readable field.
o795,40;
Sets the origin of field three at (795,40).
c25;
Sets the font for field three to font 25.
d3,std.;
Defines constant data for field three.
k10;
Sets the point size to 10.
H4;
Defines field four as a human-readable field.
o795,70;
Sets the origin of field four at (795,70).
c25;
Sets the font for field four to font 25.
d3,Qty.;
Defines constant data for field four.
k10;
Sets the point size to ten.
6-29
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Example 2 Command Descriptions (continued)
Command
Description
H5;
Defines field five as a human-readable field.
o925,0;
Sets the origin of field five at (925,0).
c25;
Sets the font for field five to font 25.
d3,100;
Defines the constant data for field five..
k40
Sets the point size to 40.
L6;
Defines field six as a line field.
o750,10;
Sets the origin for field six at (750,10).
f3;
Rotates field six 270 degrees counterclockwise around the field origin.
l130;
Sets the length of the line in field six to 130 dots.
w8;
Sets the width of field six to eight times its actual width.
L7;
Defines field seven as a line.
o35,140;
Sets the origin for field seven at (35,140).
l1075;
Sets the length of the line in field seven to 1075 dots.
w8;
Sets the line width to 8 dots.
H8;
Defines field eight as a human-readable field.
o40,165;
Sets the origin of field eight at (40,165).
c25;
Defines the font for field eight as font 25.
f3;
Rotates field eight 270 degrees counterclockwise around the origin.
r1;
Rotates the characters in field eight 90 degrees counterclockwise.
d3,Size;
Defines the constant data for field eight.
k10;
Sets the point size to ten.
H9;
Defines field nine as a human-readable field.
o100,130;
Sets the origin of field nine at (100,130).
c25;
Defines the font for field nine as font 25.
d3,1";
Defines constant data for field nine.
k40;
Sets the point size to 40.
H10;
Defines field ten as a human-readable field.
o145,165;
Sets the origin for field ten at (145,165).
f3;
Rotates field ten 270 degrees counterclockwise around the origin.
r1;
Rotates the characters in field ten 90 degrees counterclockwise.
6-30
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
Example 2 Command Descriptions (continued)
Command
Description
c25;
Sets the font for field ten to be font 25.
d3,3/4;
Defines constant data for field ten.
h16;
Sets the height to sixteen times the original size.
w65;
Sets the width to 65 times the original size.
L11;
Defines field 11 as a line field.
o310,140;
Sets the origin for field 11 at (310,140).
f3;
Rotates field 11 270 degrees counterclockwise around the origin.
l130;
Sets the length of the line in field 11 to 130 dots.
w8;
Sets the width to eight times the original size.
L12;
Defines field 12 as a line field.
o35,270;
Sets the origin of field 12 at (35,270).
l275;
Sets the length of the line in field 12 to 275 dots.
w8;
Sets the width of field 12 to eight times its actual width.
H13;
Defines field 13 as a human-readable field.
o60,560;
Sets the origin of field 13 at (60,560).
f1;
Rotates field 13 90 degrees around the origin 25.
c25;
Determines that field 13 prints in font 25.
d0,20;
Specifies that data for field 13 will be entered during Print mode and that the data will
be a maximum of 20 characters long.
k10;
Sets the point size to ten.
L14;
Defines field 14 as a line field.
o170,270;
Sets the origin of field 14 at (170,270).
f3;
Rotates field 14 270 degrees counterclockwise around the origin.
l310;
Sets the length of the line in field 14 to 310 dots.
w8;
Sets the width of field 14 to eight times the actual size.
H15;
Defines field 15 as a human-readable field.
o350,140;
Sets the origin of field 15 at (350,140).
c25;
Determines that the field prints in font 25.
d3,DUPLEX
ANGLE
CONNECTOR;
Defines constant data for field 15.
h70;
Sets the height to 70 times the original size.
6-31
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Example 2 Command Descriptions (continued)
Command
Description
w28;
Sets the width to 28 times the original size.
H16;
Defines field 16 as a human-readable field.
o205,320;
Sets the origin for field 16 at (205,320).
c25;
Determines that field 16 prints in font 25.
d3,-For Flexible
Steel and
Conduit and
.375" - .625";
Defines the constant data for field 16.
k12;
Sets the point size to 12.
H17;
Defines field 17 as a human-readable field.
o247,375;
Sets the origin of field 17 at (247,375).
c25;
Determines that field 17 prints in font 25.
d3,Diameter
Armored and
Nonmetallic
Sheath Cables;
Defines constant data for field 17.
k12;
Sets the point size to 12.
H18;
Defines field 18 as a human-readable field.
o205,450;
Sets the origin of field 18 at (205,450).
c25;
Determines that field 18 prints in font 25.
d3,-For Smooth
or Interlocking
Sheath Metal
Clad;
Defines constant data for field 18.
k12;
Sets the point size to 12.
H19;
Defines field 19 as a human-readable field.
o247,505;
Sets the origin of field 19 at (247,505).
c25;
Determines that field 19 prints in font 25.
d3,Cables .3765:
- .675" Dia. (UL
only);
Defines the constant data for field 19.
k12;
Sets the point size to 12.
L20;
Defines field 20 as a line field.
o35,580;
Sets the origin of field 20 at (35,580).
6-32
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Designing Labels and Using Commands
6
Example 2 Command Descriptions (continued)
Command
Description
l1075;
Sets the length of the line in field 20 to 1075 dots.
w8;
Sets the width to eight times the original size.
U21;
Defines field 21 as a graphic field.
o50,610;
Sets the origin of field 21 at (50,610).
c2;
Determines that field 21 prints in font two.
h9;
Sets the height to nine times the original size.
w9;
Sets the width to nine times the original size.
H22;
Defines field 22 as a human-readable field.
o220,600;
Sets the origin of field 22 at (220,600).
c25;
Determines that field 22 prints in font 25.
d3,ACE CORP.;
Defines constant data for field 22.
k20;
Sets the point size to 20.
H23;
Defines field 23 as a human-readable field.
o220,670;
Sets the origin of field 23 at (220,670).
c25;
Determines that field 23 prints in font 25.
d3,ADDRESS
3010;
Defines constant data for field 23.
k10
Sets the point size to ten.
H24;
Defines field 24 as a human-readable field.
o220,710;
Sets the origin of field 24 at (220,710).
c25;
Determines that field 24 prints in font 25.
d3,FICTION
USA;
Defines constant data for field 24.
k10;
Sets the point size to ten.
B25;
Defines field 25 as a bar code field.
o675,625;
Sets the origin of field 25 at (675,625).
c0,0;
Sets the bar code font to Code 39 with no check digit.
d0,20;
Determines that the data for field 25 is entered during Print mode and its maximum
length is 20 characters.
i25;
Determines an interpretation of bar code prints including start and stop characters.
h100;
Determines that the bar code height is 100 dots.
[email protected];
Clears all prefixes from the bar code field.
6-33
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Example 2 Command Description (continued)
Command
Descriptions
L26;
Defines field 26 as a line field.
o585,580;
Sets the origin of field 26 at (585,580).
f3;
Rotates field 26 270 degrees counterclockwise around the field origin.
l175;
Sets the length of the line in field 26 to 175 dots.
w8;
Sets the width of field 26 to eight times the actual width.
R
Sets the printer in Print mode.
<ESC>E5
Accesses format five from the printer memory.
<CAN>
Clears all host entered data for the current format and sets the field pointer to the lowest
numbered data entry field.
Lot 23455
2629333<CR>
This is the data intended for the first data entry field. <CR> instructs the printer to go to
the next data entry field.
307 91751 <CR>
This is the data intended for the next data entry field. <CR> instructs the printer to go to
the next data entry field.
<ETB>
Tells the printer to print the label.
6-34
7
Printer Commands
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
This chapter gives detailed descriptions of the commands available on the printer.
When designing label formats or printing labels, refer to this chapter for command
descriptions.
If you are using this command set to design your labels, you may want to refer to
Chapter 6 for information on label design. Chapter 6 includes sample formats of both
simple and complex labels that incorporate all different parts of label design
available by using the command set. You may also choose to use Intermec's label
design software package, PrintSet, described in Chapter 6.
Command Set Summary
The commands that take effect when downloaded to the printer depend on
which mode the printer is operating in: Print mode, Program mode, or Test
and Service mode. When the printer is in any of these modes, it responds to the
commands specific to that mode only. As described in the previous chapter,
Print mode commands are used to print labels and download data,
configuration commands are used to enable or disable printer features and
options, and Program mode commands are used for label format design.
Following the command descriptions and accompanying tables are the
functional boundaries of the printer within which you need to define the
boundaries of your labels.
Note: When using the Centronics interface, the Print mode and Test and Service mode
commands highlighted by an asterisk (*) will not receive a response from the printer. It
is a one way only (host-to-printer) interface. Refer to the Appendix for more
information.
7-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Summary of Print Mode Commands
The following table lists a summary of available Print mode commands. Each
command is described in detail later in this chapter.
7-4
Command
Code
Function
Factory
Default
8636/46
Emulation
<ACK>
First Data Entry Field, Select
yes
<BEL>
Error Code, Transmit*
yes
<BS>
Warm Boot
yes
<CAN>
Clear All Data
yes
<CR>
Next Data Entry Field, Select
yes
<DEL>
Clear Data From Current Field
yes
<DLE>
Reset
yes
<EM>
Abort Print Job
yes
<ENQ>
Status Enquiry*
yes
<ESC>C
4400 Mode, Select
yes
<ESC>D
Field Decrement, Set
1
yes
<ESC>E
Format, Select
0
yes
<ESC>F
Field, Select
0
yes
<ESC>G
Page, Select
0
no
<ESC>H
Printhead Parameters, Transmit*
<ESC>I
Field Increment, Set
<ESC>L
Label and Gap Length, Transmit*
yes
<ESC>M
Program Number, Transmit*
yes
<ESC>N
Increment and Decrement, Disable
yes
<ESC>O
Options Selected, Transmit*
yes
<ESC>P
Program Mode, Enter
yes
<ESC>Q
Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit*
yes
<ESC>SP
Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print
yes
<ESC>T
Test and Service Mode, Enter
yes
<ESC>Z
User-Defined Tables, Transmit*
yes
<ESC>c
86XX Emulation Mode, Select
no
<ESC>d
Auto-Transmit 2, Enable
yes
yes
1
yes
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
7
Printer Commands
Print Mode Commands (continued)
Factory
Default
8636/46
Emulation
Command
Code
Function
<ESC>e
Auto-Transmit 3, Enable
yes
<ESC>j
Auto-Transmit 1, Enable
yes
<ESC>k
Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable
yes
<ESC>m
Static RAM Usage, Transmit*
yes
<ESC>p
Configuration Parameters, Transmit*
yes
<ESC>u
User-Defined Characters, Transmit*
0
yes
<ESC>v
Font, Transmit*
0
yes
<ESC>x
Format, Transmit*
0
yes
<ESC>y
Page, Transmit*
1
no
<ETB>
Print
yes
<FF>
Form Feed
yes
<FS>
Numeric Field Separator
yes
<GS>
Alphanumeric Field Separator
yes
<LF>
Command Terminator 2
yes
<NUL>
Command Terminator 1
yes
<RS>
Quantity Count, Set
<SO>
Cut
yes
<SUB>
Data Shift - International Characters
yes
<US>
Batch Count, Set
<VT>
Status Dump*
1
1
yes
yes
yes
Note: Commands denoted by an asterisk (*) will not receive a reply from the printer
when used with a parallel interface.
7-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Summary of Configuration CommandsThe following table lists a
summary of the available configuration commands. These commands are only
valid under Print mode. Each command is described in detail later in this
chapter.
7-6
Command
Code
Function
Factory
Default
8636/46
Emulation
<EOT>
Postamble, Set
NUL
yes
<ESC>d
Auto-Transmit 2
yes
<ESC>e
Auto-Transmit 3
yes
<ESC>j
Auto-Transmit 1
yes
<ESC>k
Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3
yes
<ESC><SYN>
Message Delay, Set
0
yes
<SI>A
Control Panel Access Permission, Set
0
yes
<SI>C
86XX or 4400 Mode on Power Up1
yes
<SI>D
End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set
yes
<SI>F
Top of Form, Set
20
<SI>H
Printhead Pressure, Enable
0
<SI>I
Number of Image Bands, Set
3
yes
<SI>L
Maximum Label Length, Set
1000
yes
<SI>O
Online or Offline on Power Up
0
yes
<SI>R
Label Retract, Enable or Disable
0
yes
<SI>S
Print Speed, Set
35
yes
<SI>T
Label Stock Type, Select
1
yes
<SI>U
Printhead Test Parameters, Set
<SI>W
Label Width, Set
896
yes
<SI>a
Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable
0
yes
<SI>c
Cutter, Enable or Disable
0
yes
<SI>d
Dark Adjust, Set
0
yes
<SI>f
Label Rest Point, Adjust
0
<SI>g
TTR or Direct Thermal, Select
0,420
yes
yes
yes
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
7
Printer Commands
Configuration Commands (continued)
Command
Code
Function
Factory
Default
8636/46
Emulation
<SI>i
IBM Language Translation, Enable
or Disable
0
yes
<SI>l
Printer Language, Select
0
yes
<SI>r
Label Retract Distance, Set
284
yes
<SI>t
Self-Strip, Enable or Disable
0
yes
<SOH>
Preamble, Set
NUL
yes
<SYN>
Intercharacter Delay, Set
0
yes
7-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Summary of Program Mode CommandsThe following table lists a
summary of available Program mode commands. Each command is described
in detail later in this chapter.
Command
Code
Function
Factory
Default
8636/46
Emulation
Control Codes
<BEL>
Transmit Error Code
yes
<DLE>
Reset
yes
<ENQ>
Status Enquiry
yes
A
Format, Create or Edit
yes
B
Bar Code Field, Create or Edit
C
Load Command Tables
D
Delete Field
E
Erase Format
yes
F
Format, Create or Edit
yes
G
User-Defined Character, Clear or Create
yes
H
Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit
I
Interpretive Field, Edit
yes
J
Outline User-Defined Font, Clear or Create
no
L
Line Field, Create or Edit
M
Format Position in a Page, Assign
no
N
Save Current Edit Session
yes
O
Format Offset Within a Page, Define
R
Program Mode, Exit
yes
S
Page, Create or Edit
no
T
Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define
yes
U
User-Defined Character Field, Create or
Edit
Uppercase
7-8
0
yes
yes
0
0
0
0,0
0
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Program Mode Commands (continued)
Command
Code
Function
Factory
Default
8636/46
Emulation
W
Box Field, Create or Edit
0
yes
X
Character Origin Offset, Define
0
yes
Z
Font Character Width, Define
yes
Lowercase
b
Border Around Human-Readable Text,
Define
0
yes
c
Type of Graphic, Font or Bar Code, Select
0
yes
d
Field Data, Define Source
yes
e
Data Source for Format in a Page, Define
no
f
Field Direction, Define
0
yes
g
Pitch Size, Set
12
no
h
Height Magnification, Define
i
Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable
j
Outline Font Description, Download
no
k
Point Size, Set
no
l
Length of Line or Box Field, Define
100
yes
m
Format Position from Page, Delete
a
no
o
Field Origin, Define
0,0
yes
p
Code 39 Prefix Character, Define
q
Format Direction in a Page, Define
0
no
r
Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define
0
yes
s
Page, Delete
no
t
User-Defined Font Character, Clear or Create
yes
u
Graphic or UDC, Define
yes
v
Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set
yes
w
Width of Line, Box, Bar or Character, Define
yes
yes
0
yes
yes
7-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Program Mode Commands (continued)
7-10
Command
Code
Function
Factory
Default
x
Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define
yes
y
Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define
yes
z
Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define
;
Command Terminator
yes
(
Null Command
yes
)
Null Command
yes
<CR>
Null Command
yes
<LF>
Null Command
yes
2
8636/46
Emulation
yes
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Summary of Test and Service Mode CommandsThe following
table lists a summary of the available Test and Service mode commands. Each
command is described in detail later in this chapter.
Command Code
Function Description
A
Ambient Temperature, Transmit*
B
Printhead Resistance Test, Begin
C
Pitch Label, Print
D
Reset Printer Configuration
G
Gap Sensor Value, Transmit*
L
Label Path Open Value, Transmit*
M
Mark Sensor Value, Transmit*
P
Printhead Temperature, Transmit*
Q
Print Quality Label, Print
R
Test and Service Mode, Exit
S
Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit*
T
Label Taken Value, Transmit*
U
12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit*
V
24 Volt Supply Value, Transmit*
;
Command Terminator
Note: Commands denoted by an asterisk (*) will not receive a reply when used with a
parallel interface.
7-11
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Using Printer Commands According to Function
The following commands are grouped according to functionality.
Programming
A
Format, Edit
F
Format, Edit
E
Format, Erase
S
Page, Create or Edit
s
Page, Delete
R
Program Mode, Exit
N
Save
G
UDC, Clear or Create
J
UDF, Clear or Create Outline
T
UDF, Clear or Create Bitmap
Editing Pages
q
Format Direction in a Page, Define
O
Format Offset in a Page, Define
e
Format in a Page, Define Data Source
M
Format Position in a Page, Assign
m
Format Position in a Page, Delete
Editing Formats
7-12
B
Bar Code Field, Create or Edit
W
Box Field, Create or Edit
D
Field, Delete
H
Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit
I
Interpretive Field, Edit
L
Line Field, Create or Edit
U
UDC Field, Create or Edit
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Editing Bar Code Fields
r
Bar Code Ratio, Define
c
Bar Code Type, Select
h
Bar Height Magnification, Define
w
Bar Width Magnification, Define
p
Code 39 Prefix Characters, Define
f
Field Direction, Define
i
Field Interpretive, Enable/Disable
o
Field Origin, Define
d
Source of Field Data, Define
Editing Human-Readable Fields
b
Border, Define
h
Character Height Magnification, Define
w
Character Width Magnification, Define
r
Character Rotation, Define
f
Field Direction, Define
o
Field Origin, Define
c
Font Type, Select
g
Pitch Size, Set
k
Point size, Set
d
Source of Field Data, Define
Editing Interpretive Fields
b
Border, Define
h
Character Height Magnification, Define
w
Character Width Magnification, Define
r
Character Rotation, Define
f
Field Direction, Define
o
Field Origin, Define
c
Font Type, Select
g
Pitch Size, Set
k
Point size, Set
7-13
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Editing Line Fields
f
Field Direction, Define
o
Field Origin, Define
l
Length of Line Field, Define
w
Width of Line Field, Define
Editing UDC Fields
h
Character Height Magnification, Define
w
Character Width Magnification, Define
f
Field Direction, Define
o
Field Origin, Define
c
UDC Type, Select
Editing Box Fields
f
Field Direction, Define
o
Field Origin, Define
h
Height of Box Field, Define
l
Length of Box Field, Define
w
Width of Box Field, Define
Editing UDCs
7-14
y
Bitmap Cell Height of UDC, Define
x
Bitmap Cell Width of UDC, Define
u
One Column of Bitmap, Define
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Editing Bitmap UDFs
y
Bitmap Cell Height of UDF, Define
x
Bitmap Cell Width of UDF, Define
X
Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define
t
Font Character, Define
Z
Font Character Width, Define
z
Intercharacter Space, Define
u
One Column of Bitmap, Define
Editing Outline UDFs
j
Outline Font Description, Download
y
Height of Base Character, Define
x
Width of Base Character, Define
System
<BEL>
Error Code, Request
<EM>
Print Job, Abort
<DLE>
Reset
<VT>
Status Dump
<ENQ>
Status Enquiry
<BS>
Warm Boot
7-15
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Printing
7-16
<ESC> c
86XX Emulation Mode, Select
<ESC> C
4400 Advanced Mode, Select
<GS>
Alphanumeric Field Separator
<US>
Batch Count, Set
<CAN>
Clear All Data
<DEL>
Clear Data From Current Field
<ACK>
Data Entry Field, Select First
<CR>
Data Entry Field, Select Next
<SUB>
Data Shift
<ESC> D
Field Decrement, Select
<ESC> F
Field, Select
<ESC> I
Field Increment, Set
<ESC> N
Field Increment/Decrement, Disable
<FF>
Form Feed
<ESC> E
Format, Select
<FS>
Numeric Field Separator
<ESC> G
Page, Select
<ETB>
Print
<ESC> P
Program Mode, Enter
<RS>
Quantity Count, Set
<ESC> <SP>
Start/Stop Characters Only, Enter
<ESC> T
Test and Service Mode, Enter
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Configuring
<SI> C
Advanced or 86XX Mode on Power Up*
<SI> a
Audible Alarm, Enable/Disable
<SI> A
Control Panel Access Security Level, Set
<SI> c
Cutter, Enable/Disable*
<SI> d
Dark Adjust
<SI> g
DT/TTR Media Grade, Set
<SI> D
End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set
<SI> f
Label Rest Point, Adjust
<SI> r
Label Retract Distance, Set
<SI> R
Label Retract, Enable/Disable*
<SI> T
Label Stock Type, Select*
<SI> W
Label Width, Set
<SI> L
Maximum Label Length, Set*
<SI> I
Number of Image Bands, Set
<SI> O
Online/Offline on Power Up, Select*
<SI> S
Print Speed, Set
<SI> l
Printer Language, Select
<SI> U
Printhead Failure Condition and Threshold, Set
<SI> g
Select TTR or Direct Thermal
<SI> t
Self-Strip. Enable/Disable*
<SI> F
Top-of-Form, Set
D
Reset Memory to Default (Test and Service
Command)
Note: When enabling these commands, you need to reset the printer or cycle its power.
7-17
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Transmitting
<ESC> p
Configuration Parameters, Transmit
<ESC> x
Format, Transmit
<ESC> L
Label and Gap Length, Transmit
<ESC> y
Page, Transmit
<ESC> H
Printhead Parameters, Transmit
<ESC> M
Program Number, Transmit
<ESC> Q
Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit
Remaining
<ESC> m
Static RAM Usage, Transmit
<ESC> O
Options Selected, Transmit
<ESC> u
UDC, Transmit
<ESC> v
UDF, Transmit
<ESC> Z
User-Defined Tables, Transmit
Protocol Modification
7-18
<ESC> j
Autotransmit 1, Enable
<ESC> d
Autotransmit 2, Enable
<ESC> e
Autotransmit 3, Enable
<ESC> k
Autotransmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable
<SYN>
Intercharacter Delay, Set
<ESC> <SYN>
Message Delay, Set
<SOH>
Preamble, Set
<EOT>
Postamble, Set
C
Protocol/Command Tables, Set
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Test and Service
U
12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit
V
24 Volt Supply Value, Transmit
A
Ambient Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit
L
Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit
T
Label Taken Sensor Values, Transmit
Q
Print Quality Label, Print
B
Printhead Resistance Test, Start
S
Printhead Resistance Value, Transmit
P
Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit
M
Mark Sensor Value, Transmit
D
Reset Memory to Default
R
Test and Service Mode, Exit
G
Gap Sensor Value, Transmit
Cutter
<SI> c
Cutter, Enable/Disable
<SI> R
Label Retract, Enable/Disable
<SI> r
Label Retract Distance, Set
<BS>
Warm Boot
<SO>
Cut
Self-Strip
<SI> R
Label Retract, Enable/Disable
<SI> t
Self-Strip, Enable/Disable
<BS>
Warm Boot
Automatic Printhead Resistance Test
<SI> U
Printhead Failure Condition and Threshold, Set
7-19
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Print Mode Commands
The printer must be in Print mode to perform any of the following:
•
Pass data to formats
•
Print labels
•
Change printer configuration
When you enter data into a format for printing, the printer uses a field pointer
to designate the field in the format where the data should print. If a new format
is chosen, the field pointer automatically points to the lowest numbered data
entry field and will continue to point to that field unless a different field or
format is selected. If a selected field already contains data, it will be overwritten
by the new data. If the pointer is pointing to the same field that just accepted
data, the new data will be concatenated to the previously entered data.
You may send Print mode commands through the methods described in
Chapter 6. The command string to enter Print mode from Program mode or
Test and Service mode is:
<STX>R<ETX>
Note: Each string of commands must be preceded by the start of message character
<STX>, and followed by the end of message character <ETX>. All Print mode
commands are terminated by the next command in the message. The command
separator (<NUL> or <LF>) is optional between commands, but is necessary to
separate commands from data.
The following command descriptions explain the print commands that are
effective when the printer is in Print mode. The commands are listed in
alphabetical order according to the command description.
4400 Mode, Select
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Instructs the printer to operate in 4400 mode.
<ESC>C
The field pointer designates the first field in format 0. Page 0 is the default
page.
All data downloaded before switching operating modes is lost.
7-20
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
86XX Emulation Mode, Enter
Purpose:
Instructs the printer to operate in 86XX mode.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<ESC>cn
n = 1 specifies emulation with 15 mil (0.015 inch) dot size for bar codes only
(other fields will be at the 10 mil dot size).
n = 0 specifies 10 mil (0.010 inch) dot size.
Notes:
The field pointer designates the first field in format 0.
The page select command is disabled and all previously downloaded data is
lost.
Abort Print Job
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Stops batch printing.
<EM>
The printer sets the remaining quantity and batch counts to 1. Other
commands remaining in the buffer will continue to be executed.
Alphanumeric Field Separator
Purpose:
Syntax:
Increments or decrements alphanumeric characters within a region.
<GS>
Alphanumeric characters are 0 to 9 and A to Z.
The order of the characters is as follows:
0, 1, 2.....8, 9, A, B, C......Y, Z, 0, 1....9, A, B.....
Notes:
You may have more than one region in a field as long as they do not overlap
and they are incremented or decremented independent of each other.
Increment and decrement regions cannot overlap.
If there are any non-alphanumeric characters within this region, they are
ignored.
7-21
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Batch Count, Set
Purpose:
Sets the number of labels to be printed in the next batch.
Default:
n=1
Syntax:
<US>n
The range for n is from 1 to 9999.
Notes:
The total number of labels printed per print command is equal to the quantity
in each batch multiplied by the number of batches.
An error code (21) is generated if n is out of range.
See “Optimizing Image Bands for Batch Printing” in Chapter 5.
Clear All Data
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Clears all host-entered data from the current page or format.
<CAN>
If no page is selected, the pointer indicates the first data entry field in the
format after the data is cleared. If a page is selected, the pointer designates the
first data entry field in the first format.
Clear Data From Current Field
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Deletes data from the current field.
<DEL>
The field pointer continues to designate the current field even after the data is
cleared.
Command Terminator 1
Purpose:
Syntax:
Terminates the current command.
<NUL>
Command Terminator 2
Purpose:
Syntax:
7-22
Terminates the current command.
<LF>
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Configuration Parameters, Transmit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Uploads the current configuration commands from the printer.
<ESC>p
Only the configuration parameters that can be set from the host are received.
Use this command to view, edit, or copy the current configuration command
settings.
Cut
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Advances the label out to the cutter and cuts the label stock.
<SO>
This command is only executed if the cutter is installed but not enabled.
Data Shift - International Characters
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Allows command characters to entered as data.
<SUB>
In 8636/46 operating mode, this command shifts the next character (if not a
control character) into the upper character bank (setting the eighth bit to 1) to
print international characters.
This allows command characters to be entered as data instead of commands in
both 4400 and 86XX mode.
An error code is generated if an invalid character follows this command.
Error Code, Transmit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Solicits error codes from the printer.
<BEL>
The most recent error code is sent back in the form of an ASCII number. The
error code represents a command syntax error or a printer RAM usage error.
If no errors have occurred since powering on the printer, the printer sends a
zero.
7-23
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Field Decrement, Set
Purpose:
Sets the field decrement value for the current field.
Default:
n=1
Syntax:
<ESC>Dn
The range for n is from 1 to 9999.
Field decrement values in data fields are decremented by n after each print.
Notes:
An error code (22) is generated if the decrement value is out of range.
Field Increment, Set
Purpose:
Sets the increment value for the selected field.
Default:
n=1
Syntax:
<ESC>In
The range for n is from 1 to 9999.
Field increment values in data entry fields are incremented by n after each
print.
Notes:
An error code is generated if the increment value is out of range.
Field, Select
Purpose:
Selects a data field for entering or working with data.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<ESC>Fn or <ESC>F “name”
The range for n is from 0 to 199.
Notes:
The parameter for this command may be either the field number or the field
name. It cannot be both. If neither are present, the printer defaults to 0.
If the field number is used, all following data is entered into field n. If the field
name is used, all following data is entered into all fields and in the current
format or page. The field name must be bracketed by quotation marks (“”).
An error code (33) is generated if an invalid field number is entered.
7-24
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
First Data Entry Field, Select
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Uses the field pointer to select the lowest numbered data entry field that can
accept Print mode data.
<ACK>
This command ensures that data will print in the field with the lowest number
if you do not want to specify a data field by its field number.
Font, Transmit
Purpose:
Uploads a font from the printer in the form of commands and data the printer
receives to create the font.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<ESC>vn
n is the font ID number.
The range is from 0 to 25.
Notes:
The data is in 4400 advanced mode form. Each data byte represents 6 bits of the
font's bitmap.
A target printer to which the commands and data are sent remain in 4400
mode.
Form Feed
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Feeds a label out to the next print point.
<FF>
If self-strip is used, the printer feeds out one blank label to the self-strip bar,
skipping an entire label.
If batch operation is used with die cut label stock, the label moves to the tear
bar.
If continuous label stock is used, the label stock will move the end-of-print skip
distance.
7-25
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Format, Select
Purpose:
Selects a format for data entry or printing.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<ESC>En
If the current page is 0, n is a numeric format ID ranging from 0 to 19.
If a page other than 0 is selected, n is an alphabetic format position within the
page with a range from a to z.
Notes:
After the format is selected, the field pointer points to the lowest numbered
data entry field.
All host entered/variable data will be cleared form this format.
An error code is generated if an invalid format number is entered.
Format, Transmit
Purpose:
Uploads a format from the printer in the form of commands and data the
printer uses to create the format.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<ESC>xn
n is the format ID number.
The range for the format ID number is from 0 to 19.
Notes:
A target printer remains in 4400 mode.
An error code is generated if an invalid format number is entered.
Increment and Decrement, Disable
Purpose:
Syntax:
7-26
Resets any increment or decrement flags for the current field.
<ESC>N
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Label and Gap Length, Transmit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Transmits the label and gap length as measured by the number of dots.
<ESC>L
Label length refers to the length of the label currently being processed. If the
label is longer than the distance between the label sensor and the printhead, the
printer transmits the length of the previous label.
If continuous stock is selected, the printer transmits the length defined by the
<SI>L command (default is 1000). The gap length is 0.
Next Data Entry Field, Select
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Moves the field pointer to the next data entry field.
<CR>
If a page is not selected and the pointer is designating the last field, the field
pointer moves back to the first data entry field in the format.
If a multiformat page is selected and the field pointer is pointing to the last
field in a format, it moves to the first field in the next format.
Numeric Field Separator
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Specifies which numeric data within a field to increment or decrement.
<FS>
You can have more than one region per field as long as they do not overlap.
The fields are incremented or decremented independent of each other.
Any non-numeric characters within the region are ignored.
Options Selected, Transmit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Uploads the list of selected options.
<ESC>O
The options include:
0
1
2
3
4
no options selected
cutter
batch takeup
self-strip and applicator
self-strip
7-27
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Page, Select
Purpose:
Selects a page for data entry or printing.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<ESC>Gn
The range for n is from 0 to 9.
Notes:
After the page is selected, the field pointer points to the lowest numbered data
entry field of the lowest position format.
All data will be cleared from this page.
An error code is generated if an invalid field number is entered.
Page, Transmit
Purpose:
Uploads a page from the printer in the form of commands used to create a
format. It also uploads all formats in a page.
Default:
n=1
Syntax:
<ESC>yn
n is the page ID number.
The range is from 1 to 9.
Notes:
A target printer receiving the commands and data remains in 4400 mode.
An error code is generated if an invalid page number is entered.
Print
Purpose:
Syntax:
Prints the current page or format with data previously entered.
<ETB>
Printhead Parameters, Transmit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
7-28
Transmits the number and size of dots in the printhead back to the host.
<ESC>H
Example: 896,5.0.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Program Mode, Enter
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Causes the printer to enter Program mode for the purpose of editing pages,
formats, fonts, or graphics.
<ESC>P
All previously entered data is lost upon execution of this command.
Program Number, Transmit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Transmits both the program number and the version number.
<ESC>M
This command uploads the program and software version number to the host
as an ASCII alphanumeric character string.
Example: 012345ver1.4.
Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Uploads the remaining quantity and batch counts for the current print job.
<ESC>Q
Quantity Count, Set
Purpose:
Sets the quantity of label batches to be printed by the next print command.
Default:
n=1
Syntax:
<RS>n
The range or n is from 1 to 9999.
Notes:
An error code is generated if the quantity is out of range.
Incrementing and decrementing of data occurs between label batches.
Reset
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Executes a printer power up reset immediately.
<DLE>
All data and commands in the input buffer are erased upon reset.
7-29
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Instructs the current Code 39 field to print only the start and stop characters.
<ESC><SP>
All previous data for the current field is cleared.
This command is only valid for Code 39 fields.
Static RAM Usage, Transmit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Uploads information on RAM usage.
<ESC>m
The amounts are measured in kilobytes.
Notes:
The printer uploads the amount of total RAM available for formats, fonts, and
UDCs. It is followed by the amount of RAM still available for use.
Status Dump
Purpose:
Syntax:
Causes the printer to upload all current printer status.
<VT>
The printer status is uploaded in the following order:
<GS>
<SO>
<US>
<US>
<EM>
<DC3>
<BS>
<FS>
<DC1>
<DC1>
<DC1>
7-30
Buffer already full
Printhead test failed
Paper path open
Ribbon fault
No label stock
Buffer now full
Takeup reel full
Label at strip pin
Skipping
Printing
Ready
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Status Enquiry
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Transmits the current printer status to the host.
<ENQ>
If more than one status is true, the printer transmits the status with the highest
priority according to the following list:
<GS>
<SO>
<US>
<US>
<EM>
<DC3>
<BS>
<FS>
<DC1>
<DC1>
<DC1>
Buffer already full
Printhead test failed
Paper path open
Ribbon fault
No label stock
Buffer now full
Takeup reel full
Label at strip pin
Skipping
Printing
Ready
Test and Service Mode, Enter
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Enters Test and Service mode.
<ESC>T
Complete all print jobs before executing this command because any data
entered prior to the command will be erased.
User-Defined Characters, Transmit
Purpose:
Uploads a graphic from the printer in the form of commands and data the
printer receives to create the graphic.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<ESC>un
n is the graphic ID number. It has a range from 0 to 99.
Notes:
The data is uploaded using 4400 mode commands. Each data byte represents 6
bits of the graphic bitmap.
The target printer receiving the commands remains in 4400 mode.
7-31
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
User-Defined Tables, Transmit
Purpose:
Syntax:
This command causes the printer to upload the user-defined command and
protocol tables the printer receives to download a new command set.
<ESC>Zt
The command table identifier t has the following values:
t=0
t=1
t=2
t=3
t=4
Notes:
Print mode commands
Escape print commands
Shift print commands
Status response
Protocol characters
Tables listing the default values are located later in this chapter at the end of
the Program mode command descriptions under “Command Tables.”
This command is used to substitute protocol and command characters.
Warm Boot
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Resets the printer with a warm boot.
<BS>
Unlike the <DLE> command, this command does not take effect immediately.
It waits until all previous commands have been executed before it takes effect.
Data sent after this command, or before the printer finishes rebooting, is lost. In
XON/XOFF mode, the printer sends back a <DC2>.
This command is useful when changes in configuration settings require a
printer reset.
7-32
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Configuration Commands
Configuration commands, like Print mode commands, are effective when the
4400 is in Print mode. Use configuration commands to:
•
Set parameters for configuration features.
•
Enable or disable options.
Configuration commands come into effect when the printer is reset or the
power is cycled. If a printer reset is needed, the warm boot command should
be used. The reset will take place after all previous commands have been
executed. This contrasts with the <DLE> reset command, which executes
immediately after it is received even if other commands are waiting to be
executed. The command string to enter Print mode from Program mode is:
<STX>R<ETX>
Note: Each string of commands must be preceded by the start of message character
<STX>, and followed by the end of message character <ETX>. All configuration
commands are terminated by the next command in the message.
The following command descriptions explain the configuration commands that
are effective when the printer is in Print mode. The command descriptions are
listed in alphabetical order.
86XX or 4400 Mode on Power Up
Purpose:
Selects 86XX or 4400 printer mode on power up.
Default:
n=1
Syntax:
<SI>Cn
n=0
n=1
Notes:
Selects 86XX printer mode.
Selects 4400 printer mode.
To make this command effective, reset the printer or cycle the power after
issuing this command.
7-33
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable
Purpose:
Turns the audible alarm feature on or off.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<SI>an
n=0
n=1
Notes:
Disables the audible alarm.
Enables the audible alarm.
This command is effective upon execution.
Auto-Transmit 1, Enable
Purpose:
Syntax:
Enables auto-transmit level 1.
<ESC>j
The status response codes are as follows:
<DC1>
<FS>
<BS>
<EM>
<US>
<US>
Notes:
Fault cleared
Label at strip pin
Takeup reel full
No label stock
Ribbon fault
Label path open
The printer automatically transmits the status response codes listed above
when necessary.
This command becomes effective upon execution.
Auto-Transmit 2, Enable
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Enables auto-transmit level 2.
<ESC>d
At level 2, the printer automatically transmits the status response code <DC1>
(room in input buffer).
This command becomes effective upon execution.
7-34
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Auto-Transmit 3, Enable
Purpose:
Syntax:
Enables auto-transmit level 3.
<ESC>e
The status response codes are as follows:
<HT>
<SOH>
<RS>
Notes:
Imager overrun
Printing is done and the buffer is empty
Insufficient RAM for printing or storage
A status response will be transmitted when this condition occurs.
This command becomes effective upon execution.
Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Disables the auto-transmit status.
<ESC>k
This command becomes effective upon execution.
Control Panel Access Permission, Set
Purpose:
Sets a security level to restrict access to certain menus depending on the value
of n.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<SI>An
n=0
n=1
n=2
n=3
Allows access to all menus (operator, configuration, installation, and
test and service).
Allows access to operator and configuration menus only.
Allows access to the operator menu only.
Denies access to all menus.
Cutter, Enable or Disable
Purpose:
Turns the Cutter feature on or off, if a Cutter option is installed.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<SI>cn
n=0
n = non-zero
Disables the Cutter.
Enables the Cutter.
7-35
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Cutter, Enable or Disable (continued)
Notes:
To make this command effective, reset the printer or cycle the power after
issuing this command.
Dark Adjust, Set
Purpose:
Sets the dark adjust command. This controls the print darkness on the labels.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<SI>dn
n ranges from -10 to 10.
Notes:
This command changes the setting in configuration.
This command becomes effective upon execution.
End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set
Purpose:
Sets the end-of-print skip distance. This distance is a number in dot size
increments that the label advances after printing. This command works for gap,
mark, or continuous label stock.
Default:
n=0
n = 141
Syntax:
<SI>Dn
Label stock mode
Continuous stock mode
n must be a number from 0 to 9999 in dot size increments.
Notes:
This command is effective upon execution.
To advance the label out to the tear bar in label stock mode, set n to 131.
If you enter a value for n, it applies to both continuous mode and label stock
mode, regardless of the mode in which the value was entered.
Entering the <SI>D command without setting any parameters returns the
setting to its default value.
This command is ineffective in Self-Strip and Cutter applications.
7-36
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable
Purpose:
Turns the IBM language translation feature on or off.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<SI>in
n=0
n=1
Notes:
Disable IBM translation.
Enable IBM translation.
This feature allows IBM compatible characters to replace standard ASCII
characters based on the current printer language. This command overrides the
language translation that is based on the current printer emulation.
This command is effective as soon as it is executed.
Intercharacter Delay, Set
Purpose:
Sets the intercharacter delay equal to n in milliseconds. The intercharacter delay
is the time delay between characters in a message transmitted by the printer.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<SYN>n
n must be a number from 0 to 9999 in milliseconds.
Notes:
This command is effective upon execution.
Label Rest Point, Adjust
Purpose:
Adjusts the point at which labels are presented for removal. Positions the gap
on the tear bar when using form feed. This command is used mostly for SelfStrip and Cutter applications.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
Notes:
<SI>fn
The range for n is from -30 (furthest back) to +30 (furthest forward) in dot
increments.
7-37
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Label Retract, Enable or Disable
Purpose:
Turns the label retract option on or off.
Default:
n=1
Syntax:
<SI>Rn
n=0
n = non-zero
Notes:
Disables label retract.
Enables label retract.
If diecut label stock is selected, the printer determines the retract distance
automatically.
If continuous label stock is selected, the printer uses the retract distance set by
the Set Label Retract Distance command. See also Select Label Stock Type
command.
This command is effective after a printer reset or power up.
Label Retract Distance, Set
Purpose:
Sets the label retract distance to n dot increments. This command works with
continuous label stock only. The label retracts to this distance at the start of a
print.
Default:
n = 284
n = 216 (6.5 mil printhead)
Syntax:
Notes:
<SI>rn
This command is effective upon execution.
Label Stock Type, Select
Purpose:
Selects the type of label stock.
Default:
n=1
Syntax:
<SI>Tn
n=0
n=1
n=2
Notes:
7-38
Continuous label stock
Label stock with gaps between labels.
Label stock with marks between labels.
To make this command effective, reset the printer or cycle the power after
issuing the command.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Label Width, Set
Purpose:
Sets the label width to n in dot increments.
Default:
n = 896
n = 672 (6.5 mil printhead)
Syntax:
<SI>Wn
n must be a number from 50 dots (0.25 inch) to 896 dots (4.4 inches).
Notes:
This command is effective upon execution.
Maximum Label Length, Set
Purpose:
Defines the maximum label length as n dot increments. This number is used
only for detecting low stock. It is not used to limit the image size of a format on
the label.
Default:
n = 1000
Syntax:
<SI>Ln
n must be a number from 200 to 4800 in dot increments.
Notes:
To make this command effective, reset the printer or cycle the power after
issuing this command.
Message Delay, Set
Purpose:
Sets the message delay to n milliseconds.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<ESC><SYN>n
n must be a number from 0 to 9999 milliseconds.
Notes:
This command is effective upon execution.
7-39
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Modified Field Reimaging
It is possible to reimage only the fields in a label format which have received
new data. If you are updating data in just a few fields, it might be faster to
utilize field reimaging than to reimage the entire label format. It is important
that you take into account the type of field you are thinking of reimaging. For
example, if you choose to reimage a field that will take longer to erase and
reimage than an entire label format, you will not be increasing throughput
(because erasing a field requires reimaging it with zeros and erasing a label just
requires clearing the RAM).
When used correctly, this command parameter can greatly increase the
throughput of your printer.
You must select a format before you can enable the field reimaging portion of
the command.
Selecting a Format for Field Reimaging
Purpose:
Selects a format for data entry or printing.
Default:
n=0
,m = 0
Syntax:
<ESC>En[,m]
If the current page is 0 (default), n is a numeric format ID ranging from 0 to 19.
If a page other than 0 is selected, n is an alphabetic format position within the
page that can be any letter from a to z.
When the ,m parameter is enabled, only the fields that receive new data are
reimaged. If ,m is set to 0, it is disabled. If ,m is set to non-zero, it is enabled.
Notes:
After the format is selected, the field pointer points to the lowest numbered
data entry field.
All host entered/variable data is cleared from this format.
An error code is generated if an invalid format is entered.
When using the field reimaging parameter, make sure that you select enough
image bands to allow the printer to retain the entire label image PLUS 1 INCH.
One image band is equal to 1 inch. Therefore, if the printed image stops at a
distance of 4 inches from the beginning of the label, you must select five image
bands to prevent reimaging.
7-40
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Number of Image Bands, Set
Purpose:
Selects the number of image bands.
Default:
n=3
Syntax:
<SI>In
n must be a number from 2 to 10 if you have 512K of RAM in the printer.
Notes:
This command is effective upon execution.
Online or Offline on Power Up
Purpose:
Selects the printer to be online or offline when it is turned on.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<SI>On
n=0
n = non-zero
Notes:
Printer is online on power up.
Printer is offline on power up.
To make this command effective, reset the printer or cycle the power after
issuing the command.
Postamble, Set
Purpose:
Sets the postamble character to n.
Default:
n = <NUL>
Syntax:
<EOT>n
When n = <NUL>, no postamble character is sent. n can be any ASCII
character.
Notes:
This command is effective upon execution.
Preamble, Set
Purpose:
Sets the preamble character equal to n.
Default:
n = <NUL>
Syntax:
<SOH>n
When n = <NUL>, no preamble character is sent. n can be any ASCII character.
7-41
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Preamble, Set (continued)
Notes:
This command is effective upon execution.
Print Speed, Set
Purpose:
Sets the print speed to n tenths of an inch per second (ips).
Default:
n = 35
Syntax:
<SI>Sn
n must be a number from 25 to 100 (corresponds to 2.5 to 10 ips) in multiples of
5.
In 4400 printers with a 6.5 mil printhead, n must be a number from 25 to 85 in
multiples of 5.
Notes:
This command is effective upon execution.
Printer Language, Select
Purpose:
Selects the printer language.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<SI>ln
where n is one of the following:
0
1
2
3
4
Notes:
USA
UK
Germany
Denmark
France
5
6
7
8
9
Sweden
Italy
Spain
8-bit ASCII
Switzerland
Only one language is used per print job.
This command is effective as soon as it is executed.
7-42
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Printhead Pressure, Set
Purpose:
Compensates for variations in the thickness of label stock.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<SI>Hn
When n = 0 it is set to low printhead pressure. When n = 1, the printhead
pressure is set to high.
Notes:
If your labels are slipping, or you notice that the pressure is too light, try
changing the pressure to the other setting.
Printhead Test Parameters, Set
Purpose:
Sets the printhead test parameters.
Default:
n=0
,m = 45
,p = 45
,q = 0
Syntax:
<SI>Un[,m][,p][,q]
n determines whether printing continues if the printhead test sends a warning.
n=0
n=1
When warning occurs, printing continues.
When warning occurs, printing stops.
,m is the positive threshold of the percentage of the allowable deviation in
resistance. ,m can be a number from 45 to 10 (corresponding to 45% to 10%).
,p is the negative threshold of the percentage of the allowable deviation in
resistance. ,p can be a number from 45 to 10 (corresponding to 45% to 10%).
,q specifies how often (in terms of the number of labels printed) to
automatically run the printhead resistance test. ,q must be a number from 0 to
9999.
,q = 0
Notes:
Disables the test.
This command is effective upon execution.
7-43
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Self-Strip, Enable or Disable
Purpose:
Turns the Self-Strip option on or off. The Self-Strip option must first be
installed from the control panel.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
<SI>tn
n=0
n=1
Notes:
Disables the self-strip option.
Enables the self-strip option.
This command becomes effective after the printer is reset or the printer power
is cycled.
Top of Form, Set
Purpose:
Sets the top-of-form (left margin) to n which is the distance, in dot increments,
from the label origin to its leading edge.
Default:
n = 20
Syntax:
<SI>Fn
n must be a number from -10 to 4000 dot increments. The negative values let
you decrease the margin and print closer to the edge of the label.
Notes:
This command is effective upon execution.
TTR or Direct Thermal, Select
Purpose:
Selects the label stock to be used.
Default:
n=0
m = 420
Syntax:
<SI>gn,m
n selects the stock to be direct thermal (DT) or thermal transfer (TTR)
n=0
n=1
Direct thermal
Thermal transfer
,m sets the sensitivity. See Chapter 4 for details on how to set this parameter.
Notes:
7-44
This command becomes effective after the printer is reset or the printer power
is cycled.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Program Mode Commands
The Program mode commands are used specifically for label format design and
to download user-defined fonts and graphics. To set the printer to Program
mode, send the following command string:
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>
When creating or editing formats the printer uses a field pointer to designate
the field that is to be modified when the printer is in Program mode. In order to
download commands in Program mode, you must specify the field to be
changed. If you do not select a field, the pointer will continue to point to the
last selected field until a different format or field is selected.
New formats contain a default human-readable field numbered H0. New pages
do not contain a default format.
Note: Each string of commands must be preceded by the start of message character
<STX>, and followed by the end of message character <ETX>. The semicolon (;) is the
command terminator. All commands in Program mode must end with this terminator
except the last command in a message. Parentheses {( )} and <LF> characters are
ignored by the printer.
The following command descriptions explain the commands that are effective
when the printer is in Program mode. The command descriptions are listed in
alphabetical order.
Bar Code, Select Type
Purpose:
Selects a symbology for a bar code field.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
cn[,m1][,m2][,m3]
Values for n can range between 0 to 11.
Notes:
Modifiers apply only to bar code symbologies. Fonts and bar codes are listed at
the end of the Program mode command descriptions.
7-45
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Bar Code Field, Create or Edit
Purpose:
Use this command to edit or create a bar code field n.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
Bn[,name]
n values can range between 0 and 199.
,name is optional. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but cannot start
with a numeric character.
Notes:
Parameters for the default field:
Field origin
Field direction
Bar code
Check digits
Prefix
Ratio
Interpretive
Height magnification
Width magnification
Data origin
Data length
0,0
0 degrees
Code 39
disabled
one
3 to 1
disabled
50
1
Print mode
20
Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define
Purpose:
Defines the height of a graphic or user-defined font.
Default:
n=1
n = 10
Syntax:
Bitmap fonts and graphics
Outline fonts
yn
n values can range between 1 and 600.
n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n
represents the height of the base character in number of dots.
Notes:
7-46
An error code (52) is generated for an invalid height.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define
Purpose:
Defines the maximum width for a graphic or any character in a font. Each
character has a width within this amount, which should be at least as wide as
the widest character in the font.
Default:
n=1
n = 10
Syntax:
Bitmap fonts and graphics
Outline fonts
xn
n values can range between 0 and 599. n is the number of columns for the
UDC, bitmap, or user-defined font.
For outline fonts, n represents the width of the base character in number of
dots.
Notes:
An error code (52) is generated if the width is invalid.
Box Field, Create or Edit
Purpose:
Use this command to access or create a box field n.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
Wn[,name]
n values can range between 0 and 199.
,name is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but
cannot start with a numeric character.
Notes:
Parameters for the default field:
Field origin
Field direction
Box length
Box height
Box width
0,0
0 degrees
100
100
1
7-47
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Box or Line Field, Define Length
Purpose:
Defines the length of a line or box. The length of a line or box field is given in
number of dot increments.
Default:
n = 100 dots
Syntax:
ln
n values can range between 1 and 9999 dots.
Character Origin Offset, Define
Purpose:
Defines the offset, to the right, of all characters in a font. If each character's
width is defined in columns, with the first column numbered 0, then the origin
of each character is at the column with the same number as n.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
Xn
n values can range between 0 and 599.
Example: n = 2 shifts the character origins over two columns to the right.
Notes:
For bitmap fonts only.
Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define
Purpose:
Defines the character rotation for human-readable fields, or the bar code ratio
for a bar code field.
Default:
n=0
n=1
Syntax:
Character rotation
Bar code ratio
rn
For human-readable fields, n determines the rotation.
n=0
n=1
Horizontal
90 degrees counterclockwise.
For bar code fields, the ratio of the wide element to narrow element depends on
the value of n as follows:
n=0
n=1
n=2
Notes:
7-48
2.5 to 1
3.0 to 1
2.0 to 1
If the bar code width is odd and r0 is selected, r1 will be substituted.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Code 39 Prefix Character, Define
Purpose:
Defines the prefix for a Code 39 field. The prefix is only valid for Code 39
fields.
Default:
No prefix
Syntax:
p[n1][n2][n3][n4];
n values can range between uppercase A to Z and 0 to 9.
Notes:
The @ character clears all prefixes when entered as n1. Prefix characters do not
appear in the interpretive field.
Delete Field
Purpose:
Deletes field n from the format.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
Dn
n values can range between 0 and 199.
Notes:
The last field in a format cannot be deleted. If the current field is deleted, the
field pointer points to the next field. If the master field is deleted, all slave
fields of that master field are deleted.
Edit Session, Save Current
Purpose:
Syntax:
Saves the current page, format, UDC, or UDF being edited. The printer remains
in Program mode.
N
Erase Format
Purpose:
Syntax:
Erases format ID number n.
En
n values can range between 1 and 19.
7-49
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Field Data, Define Source
Purpose:
Defines a data source for the current field and how many characters are in the
field.
Default:
n = 0.20
n = 0,30
Syntax:
Bar code fields
Human-readable fields
dn[,m1][,m2];
d0[,m] and d1[,m];
Optional data is entered in Print mode. m is the maximum number of data (up
to 250) that can be entered into this field. The default for m is 20 characters for
bar code fields, and 30 characters for human-readable fields.
d2[,m1][,m2];
Data is copied into this field from field m. x is an optional positive integer
numeric field offset that can range from 0 to 9999, with 0 as the default. Only
data delimited by numeric field separator (FS) or alphanumeric field separator
(GS) can be offset. A bar code field cannot copy data from a human-readable
field, but a human-readable field can copy data from a bar code field.
d3[,m1]
Fixed data m1 is stored as part of the format and is used every time the current
field is printed. The maximum number of characters in a field (including nonprinting characters) is 250. Data entered cannot be changed by print
commands.
Field Direction, Define
Purpose:
Defines the field rotation.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
fn
n=0
n=1
n=2
n=3
7-50
Horizontal
Rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from horizontal
Rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise from horizontal
Rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise from horizontal
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Field Origin, Define
Purpose:
Defines the origin for a field. The field origin is the upper left corner of the
field. Horizontal n and vertical m locations represent the number of dot
increments from the label's origin. The origin (0,0) is the upper left square on
the label.
Default:
n=0
m=0
Syntax:
on,m
n values can range between 1 and 19999
,m values can range between 1 and 19999.
Font, Select Type
Purpose:
Selects a font type for human-readable fields.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
cn[,m1][,m2][,m3]
For human-readable fields, n values can range between 0 and 41.
Notes:
Modifiers apply only to bar code symbologies. Fonts and bar codes are listed at
the end of the Program mode command descriptions.
Font Character Width, Define
Purpose:
Defines the amount of space from the origin of one letter to the origin of the
next. If n is too small characters may overlap.
Default:
Character's bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the
intercharacter space (zn).
Syntax:
Zn
n values can range between 0 and 599.
Notes:
For bitmap characters only.
7-51
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Format, Create or Edit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Use this command to edit or create a format n.
An[,name]
n is the format ID number. Values can range between 1 and 19.
,name is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but
cannot start with a numeric character.
Notes:
An error code is generated if the format number is out of range.
Format, Create or Edit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Use this command to edit or create a format n.
Fn[,name]
n is the format ID number. Values can range between 1 and 19.
,name is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but
cannot start with a numeric character.
Notes:
An error code is generated if the format number is out of range.
Format Data in a Page, Define Source
Purpose:
Defines a data source for a format assigned to a page position.
Default:
n=0
m1 = a
m2 = 0
Syntax:
en[,m1][,m2];
e0;
The format receives its data during Print mode.
e1[,m1][,m2];
The format is a slave of another format within this page.
,m1 is the position of the master format within the page. The default is a.
,m2 is the data offset to apply to the slave format. The default is 0. Only data
delimited by numeric field separator <FS> or alphanumeric field separator
<GS> can be offset.
Notes:
7-52
The format ID must be the same for both the master and slave formats.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Format Direction in a Page, Define
Purpose:
Defines the format directions within a page.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
qn
n=0
n=1
n=2
n=3
Horizontal.
Rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise from horizontal.
Rotate 180 degrees counterclockwise from horizontal.
Rotate 270 degrees counterclockwise from horizontal.
Format Offset With a Page, Define
Purpose:
Defines the format offsets within a page and creates new origins for fields
within a format by adding the format offsets to the original field offsets. m and
n represent increments of dot sizes.
Default:
n=0
,m = 0
Syntax:
On,m
n values can range between 1 and 19999.
,m values can range between 1 and 19999.
Format Position in a Page, Assign
Purpose:
Assigns the format n to page position p. p is the page position and n is the
numeric format ID.
Default:
p=a
Syntax:
Mp,n
p values can range between a and z.
,n values range from 0 to 19.
Notes:
A format may be in multiple positions. An error code is generated if the format
ID is out of range.
7-53
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Format Position From Page, Delete
Purpose:
Deletes the format position p from a page. p is the page position.
Default:
p=a
Syntax:
mp
p values can range between a and z.
Graphic or UDC, Define
Purpose:
Syntax:
This is the command to map one column of bitmap for a graphic or a font
character. n is the column to be mapped.
un,m...m
n values can range between 0 and 599.
Notes:
In 86XX mode, m...m is a string of 1s and 0s that make up the column and
specify whether or not to print in that row element of the column (m = 1 prints,
m = 0 does not). Any unmapped columns or row elements default to m = 0.
In 4400 mode, each data byte m represents 6 bits of the bitmap.
Graphic, Select Type
Purpose:
Selects a graphic for graphic fields.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
cn[,m1][,m2][,m3]
Values for n can range between 0 and 99.
Notes:
Modifiers apply only to bar code symbologies.
Height Magnification, Define
7-54
Purpose:
Defines box, bar code, or character height magnification. For bar code and box
fields, the height n is defined in number of dot increments.
Default:
n = 50
n = 100
n=2
n=1
Bar code height
Box height
POSTNET and human-readable fields
Graphics
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Height Magnification, Define (continued)
Syntax:
hn
n values can range between 1 and 250 for human-readable fields and graphics.
For bar code and box fields, the range for n is from 1 to 9999.
Notes:
For human-readable fields, graphics, and the POSTNET symbology, n
represents the vertical magnification of the character bitmap.
Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit
Purpose:
Use this command to edit or create a human-readable field n.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
Hn[,name]
n values can range between 0 and 199.
,name is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters except
for semicolon, but cannot start with a numeric character.
Notes:
If n does not exist, a default human-readable field is created.
Parameters for the default field:
Field origin
Field direction
Character rotation
Font
Height magnification
Width magnification
Pitch
Point
Border
Data origin
Data length
0,0
0 degrees
0 degrees
7x9 standard
2
2
disabled
disabled
disabled
Print mode
30
Human-Readable Text, Define Border Around
Purpose:
Defines a border around a human-readable field.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
No borders (black letters).
bn
n values range from 0 to 199.
7-55
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Human-Readable Text, Define Border Around (continued)
Notes:
When n is greater than 0, the field prints white letters with an n dot size border
surrounding the field.
Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define
Purpose:
Defines the intercharacter gap length for a user-defined bitmap font.
Intercharacter gap length is defined by the number of dot increments n.
Default:
n=2
Syntax:
zn
n values can range between 0 and 199.
Notes:
An error code (52) is generated for invalid lengths.
Interpretive Field, Edit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Use this command to edit an interpretive field.
In
n is the ID number of the corresponding bar code field. The range is from 0 to
199.
Notes:
n is the field ID number of the bar code field to be interpreted. Interpretive
fields cannot be created with this command; they can only be created or deleted
with the i command when editing the corresponding bar code field.
Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable
Purpose:
Determines if the interpretive field of the current bar code field prints.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
in
n=0
n=1
n=2
Notes:
7-56
Disables the interpretive field.
Enables the interpretive field with start and stop characters.
Enables the interpretive field without start or stop characters.
When enabled, the human-readable information in font 0 (7x9 std) is printed 2
dots below the bar code field, left justified.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Line Field, Create or Edit
Purpose:
Use this command to access or create a line field n.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
Ln[,name]
n values can range between 0 and 199.
,name is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters.
Notes:
Parameters for the default field:
Field origin
Field direction
Line length
Line width
0,0
0 degrees
100
1
Line or Box Field, Define Length
Purpose:
Defines the length of a line or box. The length of a line or box field is given in
number of dot increments.
Default:
n = 100 dots
Syntax:
ln
n values can range between 1 and 9999 dots.
Load Command Tables
Purpose:
Syntax:
Downloads a command table, with t as the command table identifier. This is
followed by the nibblized command entries (c1-cn) to be loaded into the table.
To change an entry in the table, the entire table must be sent to the printer as a
string of ASCII characters in hexadecimal form. Any entry not redefined
retains its old value. The printer expects two hex digit bytes for every entry in
the table.
C[t],[command 1],[ command 2], ..., [command n]
The range for t is from 0 to 4
Data must be nibblized ASCII characters ranging from 0 to 9 and A to F.
Notes:
New commands become effective after the printer is repowered or reset.
Command tables are listed later in this chapter at the end of the Program mode
command descriptions under “Command Tables.”
7-57
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Outline Font Description, Download
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
Use this command to download an outline font description. All characters are
loaded at once; not individually as with bitmap fonts but since the maximum
message length is 255 characters, the data may have to be split between
successive j commands.
jnn....nn
The printer stores all incoming data into the font selected with the J command.
(See Jn, name, )
Example:
J4, font name;
x30;y30;
jAFB0...4E; (maximum 255 characters)
jB32C...FF; (maximum 255 characters)
The font information must be sent to the printer as a string of ASCII characters
in hexadecimal form. The printer expects two hex digit bytes for every eight-bit
byte of information. Data must be nibblized ASCII characters range from 0 to 9
and A to F.
Outline User-Defined Font, Clear or Create
Purpose:
Syntax:
Selects an outline font to download.
Jn[,name]
n is the font ID number. n values can range from 3 to 6 and 8 to 19.
,name is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, except
for semicolon.
Notes:
If font n has already been defined, the font is erased and redefined.
Page, Create or Edit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Use this command to edit or create a page.
Sn
n is the numeric page ID. Values for n can range between 1 and 9.
Notes:
7-58
The default page cannot be edited. An error code is generated if a page number
is out of range.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Page, Delete
Purpose:
Syntax:
Use this command to delete a page.
sn
n is the numeric page ID. n values can range between 1 and 9.
Notes:
The default page (page 0) cannot be deleted.
Pitch Size, Set
Purpose:
In 4400 mode, this command can be used to set the pitch size which can define
the size of the characters in human-readable fields. When used, the height and
width magnification and point size are disabled.
Default:
n = 12
Syntax:
gn
n values can range between 1 and 50.
Notes:
This command can be used for both bitmap and outline fonts.
Point Size, Set
Purpose:
In 4400 mode, this command can be used to set the point size, which can define
the size of the characters in human-readable fields.
Default:
n = 12
Syntax:
kn
n values can range between 4 and 212.
Notes:
This command works most effectively on fonts c20, c21, c22, and c25.
The printer must be in 4400 (advanced) mode.
Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set
Purpose:
Syntax:
This is a null command and is ignored by the printer.
vn
7-59
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Program Mode, Exit
Purpose:
Syntax:
Instructs the printer to exit Program mode and enter Print mode. Any format
or page currently being edited is saved.
R
Reset
Purpose:
Syntax:
Causes the printer to immediately perform a power up reset. All data and
commands in the buffer are lost, even if they are entered prior to the reset
command.
<DLE>
Transmit Error Code
Purpose:
Syntax:
Notes:
The printer sends an ASCII number representing the latest host command
syntax or printer RAM usage error.
<BEL>
A table containing descriptions of each error code follows the Program mode
command descriptions.
User-Defined Character, Clear or Create
Purpose:
Syntax:
This is the command to clear or create a graphic bit map.
Gn[,name]
n values can range between 0 and 99.
,name is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters except
for semicolon, but cannot start with a numeric character.
Notes:
7-60
If graphic n has already been defined, it is erased and redefined.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit
Purpose:
Use this command to edit or create a graphic field n.
Default:
n=0
Syntax:
Un[,name]
n values can range between 1 and 199.
,name is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, except
a semicolon.
Notes:
Parameters for the default field:
Field origin
Field direction
Character rotation
UDC
Height magnification
Width magnification
0,0
0 degrees
0 degrees
0
1
1
User-Defined Font, Clear or Define Bitmap
Purpose:
Syntax:
Use this command to clear or create a user-defined bitmap font set. n is the font
ID number.
Tn[,name]
Values for n can range from 3 to 6 and 8 to 19.
,name is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters.
Notes:
If font set n has already been defined, all previous characters in the font set are
erased. An existing font cannot be edited, only recreated. To change any
characters, the entire font set must be transmitted.
7-61
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
User-Defined Font Character, Create
Purpose:
Syntax:
Specifies which font character is to be defined. n is the decimal representation
of the ASCII character.
tn[,name]
n values can range between 0 and 255.
,name is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but
cannot start with a numeric character.
Notes:
An error code is generated if the format number is out of range.
Width of Line, Box, Bar or Character, Define
Purpose:
Defines the width magnification of a line, box, bar code, or character. For line,
box, or bar code fields, the width of the narrow element is defined by number
of dot increments n. For human-readable fields, graphics and the POSTNET
symbology, n is the magnification of the character width.
Default:
n=1
n=2
Syntax:
Line, box, and bar code fields and graphics.
Human-readable fields and POSTNET.
wn
Values for n can range between 1 and 9999 for line, box, and bar code fields.
Human-readable fields, graphics, and POSTNET symbology values can range
between 1 and 250.
7-62
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Command Tables
These command tables show commands in the order they must be downloaded
when you replace the User-Defined Command/Protocol characters.
Print Mode Commands (t=0)
This list is the Print mode commands in the download order.
Print Command Description
Print Command
Hex Value
Command Terminator 1
NUL
00
Set Preamble
SOH
01
Set Postamble
EOT
04
Status Enquiry
ENQ
05
Select First Data Entry Field
ACK
06
Transmit Error Code
BEL
07
Warm Boot
BS
08
Command Terminator 2
LF
0A
Status Dump
VT
0B
Form Feed
FF
0C
Select Next Data Entry Field
CR
0D
Cut
SO
0E
Go To Shift Command Table
SI
0F
Reset
DLE
10
Set Intercharacter Delay
SYN
16
Print
ETB
17
Clear All Data
CAN
18
Abort Print Job
EM
19
Data Shift
SUB
1A
Go To Escape Command Table
ESC
1B
Numeric Field Separator
FS
1C
Alphanumeric Field Separator
GS
1D
Set Quantity Count
RS
1E
Set Batch Count
US
1F
Clear Data From Current Field
DEL
7F
7-63
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Escape Print Commands (t=1)
This list is the Escape Print commands in the order they must be downloaded.
7-64
Escape Command Description
Escape Command
Hex Value
Set Message Delay
SYN
16
Enter Start/Stop Character
(space)
20
Select 4400 Mode
C
43
Set Field Decrement
D
44
Select Format
E
45
Select Field
F
46
Select Page
G
47
Transmit Printhead Parameters
H
48
Set Field Increment
I
49
Transmit Label and Gap Length
L
4C
Transmit Software Version Number
M
4D
Disable Increment/Decrement
N
4E
Transmit Options Selected
O
4F
Enter Program Mode
P
50
Transmit Quantity and Batch Count
Q
51
Enter Test and Service Mode
T
54
Transmit User-Defined Command Tables
Z
5A
Select 86XX Emulation Mode
c
63
Enable Auto-Transmit 2
d
64
Enable Auto-Transmit 3
e
65
Enable Auto-Transmit 1
j
6A
Disable Auto-Transmit 1, 2 and 3
k
6B
Transmit Static RAM Usage
m
60
Transmit Configuration Parameters
p
70
Transmit User-Defined Characters
u
75
Transmit Font
v
76
Transmit Format
x
78
Transmit Page
y
79
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Shift Print Commands (t=2)
This list shows the Shift commands in the order they must be downloaded.
These commands must be preceded by the Go To Shift Command Table
command (default value SI) listed in the table of Print Commands (t=0).
Shift Command Description
Shift Command
Hex Value
Set Control Panel Access Permission
A
41
86XX or 4400 Mode on Power Up
C
43
Set End-of-Print Skip Distance
D
44
Set Top-of-Form
F
46
Transmit Printhead Parameters
H
48
Set Number of Image Bands
I
49
Set Maximum Label Length
L
4C
Define Static RAM Size
N
4E
Online or Offline on Power Up
O
4F
Enable or Disable Label Retract
R
52
Set Print Speed
S
53
Select Label Stock Type
T
54
Set Printhead Test Values
U
55
Set Label Width
W
57
Enable or Disable Audible Alarm
a
61
Enable or Disable Cutter
c
63
Set Dark Adjust
d
64
Label Rest Point, Adjust
f
66
Select TTR or Direct Thermal
g
67
Enable or Disable Translation
i
69
Select Printer Language
l
6C
Set Label Retract Distance
r
72
Enable or Disable Self-Strip
t
74
7-65
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Status Responses and Auto-Transmit Commands (t=3)
The following lists the status responses and auto-transmit codes in the order
they must be downloaded.
Status Description
Status Response
Hex Value
Buffer Already Full
GS
1D
Printhead Test Fail
SO
0E
Label Path Open
US
1F
Ribbon Fault
US
1F
No Label Stock
EM
19
Buffer Now Full
DC3
13
Takeup Reel Full
BS
08
Label at Strip Pin, Cutter Busy/Jammed
FS
1C
Skipping
DC1
11
Printing
DC1
11
Ready
DC1
11
Clear
DC1 -Auto-Transmit 1
11
Label at Strip Pin, Cutter Busy/Jammed
FS - Auto-Transmit 1
1C
Takeup Reel Full
BS - Auto-Transmit 1
08
No Label Stock
EM - Auto-Transmit 1
19
Ribbon Fault
US - Auto-Transmit 1
1F
Room in Buffer
DC1 - Auto-Transmit 2
11
Imager Overrun
HT - Auto-Transmit 3
09
Print Job Complete and Buffer Empty
SOH - Auto-Transmit
3
01
Insufficient RAM
RS - Auto-Transmit 3
1E
Note: The status responses in the above table are for standard protocol. In XON/XOFF
protocol, most of the status responses are the same; however, instead of DC1, the status
response is DC2, and instead of DC3, the status response is DC4.
7-66
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Protocol Commands (t=4)
The following list contains the protocol codes in the order they must be
downloaded.
Command Description
Command Characters
Hex Value
SELECT IN
GS
1D
POLL IN
FS
1C
RES IN
EOT
04
REQ IN
ENQ
05
SOM IN
STX
02
EOM IN
ETX
03
AFF IN
ACK
06
NEG IN
NAK
15
DLE IN
DLE
10
XON IN
DC1
11
XOFF IN
DC3
13
SELECT OUT
GS
1D
POLL OUT
FS
1C
RES OUT
EOT
04
REQ OUT
ENQ
05
SOM OUT
STX
02
EOM OUT
ETX
03
AFF OUT
ACK
06
NEG OUT
NAK
15
DLE OUT
DLE
10
XON OUT
DC1
11
XOFF OUT
DC3
13
Proto-Cmd 1
ENQ
05
Proto-Cmd 2
VT
0B
Timeout on EOM ACK
20 (ms) (Range: 0 - 255)
14
7-67
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Communication Protocol Characters
The following table shows the characters available for different protocols. Refer
to the protocol you are using for your system.
Protocol Characters
Standard
Polling Mode D
Multi-Drop
Select In
GS
GS
Poll In
FS
FS
Reset In
EOT
EOT
Request for Acknowledgment In
XON/XOFF
ENQ
ENQ
Start of Message In
STX
STX
STX
STX
End of Message In
ETX
ETX
ETX
ETX
ACK
ACK
Acknowledgment In
Negative Acknowledgment In
Data Line Escape In
DLE
NAK
NAK
DLE
DLE
XON In
DC1
XOFF In
DC3
DLE
Select Out
GS
Poll Out
FS
Reset Out
EOT
Request for Acknowledgment Out
ENQ
EOT
ENQ
Start of Message Out
STX
STX
End of Message Out
ETX
ETX
Acknowledgment Out
ACK
ACK
NAK
NAK
DLE
DLE
20 (DEC)
20(DEC)
Negative Acknowledgment Out
NAK
Data Line Escape Out
DLE
DLE
XON Out
DC1
XOFF Out
DC3
Status Enquiry In
ENQ
ENQ
Status Dump In
VT
VT
Timeout on EOM ACK
7-68
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Fonts
The following table accompanies the command description for Select Type of
Graphic Font or Bar Code (cn,m1,m2,m3;) for selecting fonts. Fonts may be
selected in the following manner:
Font Selection
Font Description
c0
7x9 standard
c1
7x11 OCR
c2
10x14 standard
c3-c6
User-defined fonts
c7
5x7 standard
c8-c19
User-defined fonts
c20
8 point standard
c21
12 point standard
c22
20 point standard
c23
OCR A
c24
OCR B size 2
c25
Outline font
c30
6 point bold
c31
8 point bold
c32
10 point standard
c33
10 point bold
c34
12 point bold
c35
16 point standard
c36
16 point bold
c37
20 point bold
c38
24 point standard
c39
24 point bold
c40
30 point bold
c41
36 point bold
7-69
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Bar Codes
The following table accompanies the command description for Select Type of
Graphic, Font, or Bar Code (cn[,m1][,m2][,m3]) for selecting bar codes.
The bar codes listed below may be selected as shown. Optional modifiers are
denoted by m.
Bar Code Selection
Bar Code Description
c0 ,m
Selects Code 39. Select m to specify parameters as listed below. The default for
m is 0.
c0,0
Selects 8646 compatible Code 39. No check digit.
c0,1
Selects 8646 compatible Code 39. Printer enters check digit.
c0,2
Selects 8646 compatible Code 39. Host enters check digit and printer verifies.
c0,3
Selects full ASCII Code 39. No check digit.
c0,4
Selects full ASCII Code 39. Printer enters check digit.
c0,5
Selects full ASCII Code 39. Host enters check digit and printer verifies.
c0,6
Selects 43 character Code 39. No check digit.
c0,7
Selects 43 character Code 39. Printer enters check digit.
c0,8
Selects 43 character Code 39. Host enters check digit and printer verifies.
c1
Selects Code 93.
c2 ,m
Selects Interleaved 2 of 5. Select m to specify parameters as listed below. The
default for m is 0.
c2,0
No check digit.
c2,1
Printer enters check digit.
c2,2
Host enters check digit and printer verifies.
Selects Code 2 of 5. Select m to specify parameters as listed below. The default
for m is 0.
c3 ,m
c3,0
Selects 3-bar start/stop code.
c3,1
Selects 2-bar start/stop code.
Selects Codabar. Select m to specify parameters as listed below. Default for m is
0.
c4 ,m
7-70
c4,0
Host enters start/stop codes and printer verifies.
c4,1,x,y
Printer enters start code x and stop code y. x and y can range from A to D.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Bar Codes (continued)
Bar Code Selection
Bar Code Description
c5 ,m
Selects Code 11. Select modifiers to specify parameters as listed below. The
default for m is 0.
c5,0
Printer enters two check digits.
c5,1
Printer enters one check digit.
c5,2
Host enters two check digits. Printer verifies.
c5,3
Host enters one check digit. Printer verifies.
Selects Code 128.
c6,m1,m2
In 86XX Emulation mode, you can print the Function 1 character by entering
<SUB>1. In Advanced mode, you can print the Function 1 by entering
<SUB><SUB>1. You can print the characters for Function 2, 3, and 4 in the
same way.
UCC-128 serial shipping container code automatically starts in subset C and a
<FNC1>. It is a fixed length version of Code 128 requiring you to enter 19
numeric characters. The printer forces the first two characters to zero. The
default for ,m1 = 0 (Code 128O. The default for ,m2 = 0 (keep parentheses and
spaces).
c7,m1,m2
c6,0,0
Code 128, keep parentheses and spaces.
c6,0,1
Code 128, ignore parentheses and spaces in the bar code but keep them in the
interpretive field.
c6,1,0
Select UCC-128 Serial Shipping Container Code.
c6,1,1
Select UCC-128 Serial Shipping Container Code and keep parentheses and
spaces in interpretives.
Selects UPC/EAN with m1 as shown below. Default for m1 is 0.
The variable length option selects the UPC/EAN version by the number of
characters in the data field. The number of data characters and check
characters allowed for each version are:
EAN 8
EAN 13
UPC version A
UPC version E
UPC version D1
UPC version D2
UPC version D3
UPC version D4
UPC version D5
7 data + 1 check character
12 data + 1 check character
11 data + 1 check character
6 data + 1 check character
13 data + 1 check character
18 data + 2 check characters
22 data + 2 check characters
25 data + 3 check characters
29 data + 3 check characters
Use a “.” to delimit the bar code data from the supplemental data. Data to the
right of the “.” is supplemental data; data to the left is bar code data. You can
add the two- or five-digit supplemental to any version of the UPC/EAN code.
7-71
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Bar Codes (continued)
The flag 1 option only applies to EAN 8, EAN 13, and UPC version A. For EAN
13, enabling the flag 1 option prints the first character of the bar code
interpretive. For EAN 8 and UPC version A, enabling the flag 1 option moves
the first and last character of the bar code interpretive outside of the guard
bars.
c7,0 ,m2
Select UPC/EAN Codes. Printer enters check digit and flag 1 enable.
c7,1 ,m2
Select UPC/EAN Codes. Printer enters check digit and flag 1 disabled.
c7,2 ,m2
Select UPC/EAN Codes. Host enters check digit and printer verifies. Flag 1
enabled.
c7,3 ,m2
Select UPC/EAN Codes. Host enters check digit and printer verifies. Flag 1
disabled.
Use ,m2 to select the UPC/EAN codes listed below. Default is 0.
0 variable length
1 EAN 8
2 EAN 13
3 UPC Version A
4 UPC Version E
5 UPC Version D1
6 UPC Version D2
7 UPC Version D3
8 UPC Version D4
9 UPC Version D5
Selects HIBC Code 39 with ,m1 as shown below. Default for ,m1 is 0.
c8,m1,m2
The next three modifiers conform to Supplier Standard:
c8,0
Selects HIBC Code 39. Primary format.
c8,1
Selects HIBC Code 39. Alternate primary format.
c8,2,m2
Selects HIBC Code 39. Secondary format. The linkage character comes from
,m2 (which is the field identifier).
The next four modifiers conform to Provider Standard:
c8,3
Single format.
c8,4
First data format.
c8,5,m2
Selects HIBC Code 39. Second data format. The linkage character comes from
,m2 (which is the field identifier).
c8,6
Selects HIBC Code 39. Multiple data format.
c9
Selects Code 16K.
c10
Selects Code 49.
c11
Selects POSTNET.
7-72
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Bar Codes (continued)
Bar Code Selection
Bar Code Description
c12,m1,m2,m3
Selects PDF 417. The modifiers and their defaults are described below.
m1 = 0
Printer selects the number of columns needed to create a symbol that is as close
to square as possible.
m2 = 9
The printer automatically selects the error correction level, based on the
amount of data.
m3 = 0
Truncating disabled.
m1 selects the number of columns of data characters. The range is 0 to 30 and
the default is 0. If you select zero, the printer provides the number of columns
needed to create a symbol that is as close to a square as possible.
Note: When you select zero, the printer selects a height magnification that is three
times the width magnification. The specifications of PDF417 recommend these
magnification values for creating a symbol that you can scan easily.
m2 selects the level of error correction as shown in the table below. Each level
provides a certain number of error detection characters, which can detect and
recover a specific number of faulty characters.
m2
Recommended
Data Amount
Error Detection
Characters
0*
1*
2
3
4
5
6†
7†
8†
9‡
*
*
1-40
41-160
161-320
321-863
863+
863+
863+
(default)
2 (error detected, no recovery)
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
* Not recommended. Should only be used if your labels are too small to allow
more characters.
†Not recommended. Reserved for special applications.
‡The printer sets the recommended value for each symbol.
m3 is a truncate flag. The values for m3 are 0 to disable truncating and 1 to
enable truncating.
7-73
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Bar Codes (continued)
Bar Code Selection
Bar Code Description
c13,m1,m2,m3
Selects Code One. The modifiers are described briefly below and the
defaults are shown.
m1 = 0
Code One version, variable.
m2 = 1
First position in the group.
m3 = 1
Total number of symbols in the group is one symbol.
m1 determines the Code One version, and the values are listed below.
Code One, variable length (Autoselects from Code One version A to
Code One version H)
c13,0,m2,m3
c13,1,m2,m3
Code One version A
c13,2,m2,m3
Code One version B
c13,3,m2,m3
Code One version C
c13,4,m2,m3
Code One version D
c13,5,m2,m3
Code One version E
c13,6,m2,m3
Code One version F
c13,7,m2,m3
Code One version G
c13,8,m2,m3
Code One version H
c13,9,m2,m3
Code One version S10
c13,10,m2,m3
Code One version S20
c13,11,m2,m3
Code One version S30
c13,12,m2,m3
Code One version T16
c13,13,m2,m3
Code One version T32
c13,14,m2,m3
Code One version T48
Note: The data lengths in the following table are approximations of the maximum amount
of data for each version of Code One. The data is compressed before it is encoded, which
shortens its length from the amount you send. If you select the variable length, the printer
may select a Code One version that is smaller than the one listed next to your data length.
7-74
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
7
Printer Commands
Bar Codes (continued)
The following table shows the data lengths for each Code One version.
m1 Value
Code One Type
0
variable*
1
Full ASCII
Alphanumeric
Numeric
A
10
13
22
2
B
19
27
44
3
C
44
64
104
4
D
91
135
217
5
E
182
271
435
6
F
370
553
886
7
G
732
1096
1755
8
H
1480
2218
3550
9
S10
†
†
6
10
S20
†
†
12
11
S30
†
†
18
12
T16
10
13
22
13
T32
24
34
55
14
T48
38
55
90
*The printer selects the correct Code One version, between A and H.
†Supports numeric data only.
m2 and m3 define symbols that are part of a group. m2 is the position of the
current symbol in the group, and m3 is the total number of symbols in the
group.
For example, a setting of ,m2,m3 to ,2,5 indicates that the current symbol
definition is the second in a group of five.
Both m2 and m3 have a range from 1 to 15, with a default of 1. Make sure m2 is
never greater than m3.
Note: The printer does not check to ensure all positions of a group are defined. For
example, if m3 is set to 5, and only three positions are defined, the printer will print
three symbols that are encoded to be part of a group of five symbols. When these
symbols are scanned, the scanner will wait for all five symbols and will not be able to
transmit the data.
7-75
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Bar Codes (continued)
Bar Code Selection
Bar Code Description
c14,m1,m2,m3
Selects Maxicode. Default for m1 is 0. m2 and m3 are not currently supported.
c14,0
Structured Carrier Message.
Selects HIBC Code 128 with m1 as shown below. Default for m1 is 0.
c16,m1,m2
The next three modifiers conform to Supplier Standard:
c16,0
Primary format.
c16,1
Alternate primary format.
c16,2,m2
Secondary format. The linkage character comes from m2 (which is the field
identifier).
The next four modifiers conform to Provider Standard:
c16,3
Single format.
c16,4
1st data format.
c16,5,m2
2nd data format. The linkage character comes from m2 (which is the field
identifier).
c16,6
Multiple data format.
More About Printing 2D Symbologies
When you encode and print 2D symbologies, use the following guidelines:
7-76
•
Select a symbol size that can encode all the data being downloaded. If you
select one that is too small, then the symbol will not print. If you do not
know the amount of data you are sending, allow space for the largest
possible amount.
•
In Program mode, the data length is confined to 255 characters. This means
that the d3 command, which is used to define data in Program mode,
cannot be followed by more than 255 characters. To send more than 255
characters, you must send the data in Print mode using the d0 command.
•
To send more than 255 characters in Print mode with the d0 command, you
must separate the data into packets of 255 characters. These packets are
separated by <STX> and <ETX>.
•
The maximum amount of data that can be entered into a field with the d0
command is 3550 characters. However, if you are declaring d0 fields to be
much larger than necessary, you may run out of memory, especially if you
use the maximum value of 3550. To avoid wasting memory, estimate the
largest amount of data you will send and use a value that is close to that
amount.
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
More About PDF 417
2D symbols encode data by compressing it in different amounts. Therefore,
these values should be used as guidelines. The exact data capacity varies with
the actual data being encoded.
Full ASCII
Alphanumeric
Numeric
1108
1850
2725
Using m1 to Select Number of Columns
When you select the default for m1 (0), the printer selects a height
magnification that is three times the width magnification. The specifications of
PDF 417 recommend these magnification values for creating a symbol that you
can easily scan.
Using m2 to Select an Error Correction Level
The level of error correction that works best for your data depends on the
amount of characters in your symbols. If you decide to select your own error
correction level, you will need to estimate the number of characters since they
are formed by compressing the raw data you send to the printer. In general, 1.8
alphanumeric characters generate one symbol character. If you are using
numeric data, 2.9 digits generate one data symbol character.
Intermec recommends that you leave the error correction level at the default
setting of 9. This default setting lets the printer select a level, between level 2
and level 5, that provides the most efficient error correction of your data. The
level selection is based on the number of symbol characters generated by your
data.
Using m3 to Set the Truncate Flag
m3 is a truncate flag that indicates whether to print the symbol in truncated
form. If truncated, the symbols are printed without right row indicators and
with only a one-module wide stop character. To minimize errors and maintain
the best reading performance, Intermec recommends that you leave m3 equal
to 0. Setting the truncate flag loses the symbol redundancy. Since row
indicators are not error-corrected, elimination of one set of them increases your
chances of losing row identification.
More About Code One
Code One modules must be square. Therefore, when you define a field for
Code One, you only need to enter one value for both the height and width
magnification. If you enter more than one value, the printer uses the last value
for both height and width and ignores all previously entered magnification
values. If no value is entered, the printer uses the default value.
7-77
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
You can use groups of Code One symbols to encode data so separate symbols
can be scanned more efficiently. When you scan a group of symbols, the
scanner accumulates the data from all members of the group and transmits the
data as if it came from a single symbol.
Using m1 to Select a Code One Version
It is important that you select the correct version of Code One for the data you
are encoding. If you try to encode an inappropriate amount of data or an
incorrect type of data in the wrong version, your symbol may not print.
If your data lengths vary greatly for different labels, or if you are not sure
which symbology to select, you can select the variable Code One version (set
m1=0). This lets the printer select the correct version of Code One (from version
A to version H) based on the data length. If your data lengths are known and
consistent, or if the printer always chooses the same version, you should
manually select the Code One version to save printer memory.
When you print Code One symbols, you may notice that part of your symbol
contains no data. Each version of Code One has a fixed size, and the version
that is large enough to accommodate all your data may be larger than you
need. This does not mean you should use a version of a smaller size, because if
it is too small for your data to fit, the symbol will not print.
More About Maxicode
When selecting Maxicode, you have to format your data into the following five
fields:
Field
Number of Characters
Description of field
Default
1
five
Zip code
None
2
four
Zip code extension
None
3
three
Service class
999
4
three
Country code
840 (U.S.)
5
84
Message
None
Fixed-length fields If you will always fill in all fields, you can string the
characters together without a delimiter.
Carat-delimited fields If you may want to use the default value for a field
instead of typing it in, place carats (^) between each field. To use the default
value for a field, do not place any characters between the carats.
7-78
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Printer Commands
7
Test and Service Mode Command Descriptions
The following table gives descriptions of the Test and Service mode commands.
To enter Test and Service mode from Print mode, send <ESC>T from the host
terminal.
Note: All commands in Test and Service mode end with a semicolon (;) except the last
command in a message.
Command
Code
Summary
Description
A;
Transmit Ambient
Temperature
Transmits the ambient temperature sensor A/D output back to
the host. The value ranges from 00 to 255.
B;
Printhead Resistance Test
Causes the printer to begin the printhead resistance test. The
printer will respond with the ASCII character string “pass” or
“fail.”
C;
Print Pitch Label
Causes the printer to print the pitch label.
D;
Reset Printer Configuration
Sets the printer configuration to the factory defaults. When
you exit Test and Service mode after sending this command,
the printer performs a warm boot (it resets).
G;
Transmit Transmissive
Sensor Value
Transmits the label gap transmissive sensor A/D output back
to the host. Value ranges from 00 to 255.
L;
Transmit Paper Path Open
Sensor Value
Transmits the paper path open switch value back to the host.
A value of 0 indicates the paper path is open and a value of 1
means it is closed.
M;
Transmit Reflective Sensor
Value
Transmits the label mark reflective sensor A/D output back to
the host. The value ranges from 00 to 255.
P;
Transmit Printhead
Temperature Sensor Value
This command transmits the printhead thermistor A/D output
back to the host. Range of the value is 00 to 255.
Q;
Print Quality Label
Causes the printer to print out the print quality program and
model number label.
R;
Exit Test and Service
Causes the printer to exit Test and Service mode.
S;
Transmit Printhead
Resistance Values
Transmits the average, maximum, and minimum printhead
dot resistance value back to the host. Each value is a numeric
data string separated by a comma.
T;
Transmit Label Taken
Sensor Value
Transmits the label taken sensor A/D output back to the host.
The value can range from 00 to 255.
U;
Transmit 12 Volt Supply
Value
Transmits the 12V supply A/D output back to the host. The
range of the value is 00 to 255.
V;
Transmit 24 Volt Supply
Value
Transmits the 24V supply A/D output back to the host. The
range of the value is 00 to 255.
7-79
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Printer Functional Boundaries
Every printer feature has a functional limit that assumes unlimited common
memory. Since several functions may compete for common memory, the
memory limit may be reached before the functional limit is reached.
For example, even though you have a functional limit of 20 formats, you may
run out of memory before you can store 20 formats if you have downloaded
several large graphics. In cases like this, you may want to restructure your data
or purchase additional printer memory.
7-80
Parameter
Functional Limit
Bar Code Height
50 inches
Bar Code Narrow Bar Multiplier
50
Characters in a Field (Including Control
Characters and Delimiters)
200
Characters in a Field Name
8
Field Data Offset
9999
Fields in a Format
200
Font Character Size
3 sq. inches
Formats
20 including default
Formats in a Page
26
Graphic Size
4 sq. inches
Graphics
100
Image Bands
10
Increment or Decrement Skip Value
9999
Languages
8 per seven-bit character set; 1 per
eight-bit character set
Length or Width of a Line or Box
9999 dots (50 inches)
Pages
10 including default
Quantity or Batch Size
9999
Slaves to a Field
20
User-Defined Fonts
16
8
Special Procedures
Special Procedures
8
This chapter contains instructions for the following special procedures:
•
Setting up security levels.
•
Copying the entire RAM contents from one printer to another (cloning).
•
Copying selected formats, fonts, graphics, or pages from one printer to another.
•
Installing options, such as the cutter or self-strip if you unload them during
memory reset.
About Security Levels
If you want to restrict access to certain menus in the printer, you can do so by
setting a security level. Restricting access not only prevents unauthorized
tampering with printer settings, but also eliminates the number of choices you
scroll through when selecting menus and options.
Security Level Descriptions
The following table shows the restrictions imposed by different security levels.
Security Setting
Menus Allowed
Level 0 (default)
Allows access to all control panel menus.
Level 1
Operator and Configuration menus.
Level 2
Operator menu only. The audible alarm beeps (if enabled) at an
attempt to scroll to other menus.
Level 3
Access not allowed to any of the control panel menus.
Note: Regardless of the security level setting, you can switch between online and
offline, reload media, and open the printer.
Setting a Security Level
When setting a security level, you can always access restricted menus when
necessary. Restricting menus reduces the choices when using the control panel.
To set a security level
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY screen (press [ONLINE/OFFLINE] if
necessary).
2. Press [MENU]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows the following:
OFFLINE
INSTALL MENU
8-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
3. Press [SELECT]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows the following:
INSTALL MENU
SECURITY
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows the current Security level with an
asterisk (*) such as in the example below:
SECURITY
LEVEL 0*
5. Press [↑] or [↓] until you see the security level you want, and then press
[ENTER] to move the asterisk (*) to that level as in the example below:
SECURITY
LEVEL 1*
6. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the OFFLINE READY display.
Bypassing Security Levels
You can bypass a security level if you need to access a restricted menu from the
control panel.
To bypass a security level
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Hold down the [FEED/RELOAD] key while you turn the printer on.
This procedure sets security level 0, which allows access to all menus.
Cloning
Cloning is the process of copying the RAM contents from one printer (the
sender printer) to another printer (the receiver printer). By programming and
configuring just one printer and then cloning its RAM to other printers, you
can configure a large number of printers in much less time than it would take
to program them individually.
The clone command copies the following RAM contents to the receiver printer:
•
Printer configuration data
•
Label formats, page formats, fonts, graphics and User-Defined protocol or
command tables
The cloning procedure consists of connecting the main serial ports of two
printers together with an RS-232 null modem cable. Control panel commands
are then used to designate each printer as either a sender or receiver. The
control panel on the sender printer is used to execute the clone command.
8-4
Special Procedures
8
Keep in mind these cloning limits:
•
You can only clone from like printer to like printer. You cannot clone an
8636 or 8646 printer to a 4400 printer, even when the 4400 printer is
running in the 86XX emulation mode. The reverse is also true.
•
The sender and receiver printers must be running the same firmware
revision.
•
The sender and receiver printer must have exactly the same amount of
static RAM installed.
•
If you are cloning printer configuration parameters to printers that are used
in a multi-drop environment, be sure to assign each printer a unique device
address when cloning is complete.
If you are not sure of your printer’s RAM configuration, firmware revision, or
setup configuration, print a configuration test label.
Connecting the Printers for Cloning
The first step to cloning involves connecting the sender printer (the printer
containing the information you want to copy) to the receiver printer (the
printer that is to receive the information).
To connect the sender and receiver printers
1. Obtain an RS-232 null modem serial cable with a 25-pin “D” style
subminiature plug on each end (Intermec Part No. 048668).
2. Plug one end of the cable into the serial port on the rear panel of sender
printer.
3. Plug the other end of the cable into the serial port on the rear panel of
receiver printer.
Preparing the Receiver Printer
Note: Cloning will erase any data stored in the receiver.
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display.
OFFLINE
READY
2. Press [MENU] to enter the main menu. The display shows:
OFFLINE
OPERATOR MENU
8-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
3. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
SERVICE MENU
4. Press [SELECT] to enter the Service menu. The display shows:
SERVICE MENU
PRINT PAGE
5. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
SERVICE MENU
CLONING
6. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
CLONING
SENDER
7. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
CLONING
RECEIVER
8. Press [ENTER]. The display shows:
RECEIVING
Preparing the Sender Printer
1. Switch on the printer you are designating as the sender and start at the
OFFLINE READY display:
OFFLINE
READY
2. Press [MENU] to enter the Main menu as shown below:
OFFLINE
OPERATOR MENU
3. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
SERVICE MENU
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
SERVICE MENU
PRINT PAGE
5. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
SERVICE MENU
CLONING
8-6
Special Procedures
8
6. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
CLONING
SENDER
7. Press [SELECT] again. The display shows:
SENDER
EXECUTE TEST
Leave this display on the printer, which is now designated as the sender. You
are now ready to download the contents to the receiver printer.
Downloading Sender RAM to the Receiver
Once you have designated the receiver and sender printers, you can download
the RAM contents from the sender printer to the receiver printer.
Note: You will erase any data stored in the receiver’s memory when you clone from the
sender printer.
To download the sender RAM to the receiver
1. The display on the sender printer shows:
SENDER
EXECUTE TEST
2. Press [ENTER] to start downloading the RAM contents to the receiver.
During downloading, the display shows:
TRANSFERRING
3. When the downloading process is complete, the sender printer shows:
SENDER
EXECUTE TEST
4. The receiver printer’s display shows:
CLONING
RECEIVER
Cloning is now complete. Disconnect the cable from the receiver. To clone
another printer, designate the new printer as the receiver, attach it to the
sender, and press [ENTER] on the sender.
8-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Using Selective Transfer
If you want to copy select formats, pages, fonts, or graphics to another printer
but you do not want to clone the entire RAM contents, you can use the
Selective Transfer command. This command lets you set up many printers so
they print the same label formats.
Using the Selective Transfer command, you can download the following from
one printer to another:
•
Any specified page (numbered 0 to 9), or all pages
•
Any specified format (numbered 0 to 19), or all formats
•
Any specified font (numbered 0 to 25), or all fonts
•
Any specified graphic (numbered 0 to 99), or all graphics
•
All pages, formats, fonts, or graphics
The selective transfer procedure consists of connecting the main serial ports of
two printers with an RS-232 null modem cable, designating each printer as
either a sender or receiver. The control panel of the sender printer is used to
specify which items are to be downloaded and to execute the command.
Keep in mind that the receiver printer must have sufficient RAM to
accommodate the information downloaded from the sender.
If you do not know which fonts, formats, graphics, or pages are in your printer,
you can print a configuration test label as described in “About Configuration
Test Labels” in Chapter 5.
Connecting the Printers for Selective Transfer
For this procedure, you will need an RS-232 null modem serial cable with a 25pin, D-style subminiature plug on each end (Intermec Part No. 048668).
To connect the printers
1. Plug one end of the cable into the serial port on the rear panel of sender
printer.
2. Plug the other end of the cable into the serial port on the rear panel of
receiver printer.
8-8
Special Procedures
8
Preparing the Receiver Printer
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display on the receiver printer.
2. Press [MENU]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
SERVICE MENU
3. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
SERVICE MENU
PRINT PAGE
4. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
SERVICE MENU
SELECTIVE TRANS
5. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
SELECTIVE TRANS
RECEIVER
6. Press [ENTER]. An asterisk (*) appears, indicating that the printer is now
designated as the receiver as shown below:
SELECTIVE TRANS
RECEIVER*
Preparing the Sender Printer
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display on the sender printer.
2. Press [MENU]. The display shows:
OFFLINE
OPERATOR MENU
3. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
SERVICE MENU
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
SERVICE MENU
PRINT PAGE
5. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
SERVICE MENU
SELECTIVE TRANS
8-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
6. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
SELECTIVE TRANS
RECEIVER
The sender printer is now ready (its display shows RECEIVER but you scroll to
the sender choices in the following procedures). The procedures that follow
explain how to send data to the receiver printer. Follow the procedure for the
type of data you want to send.
Sending Formats, Fonts, Pages, and Graphics to the
Receiver Printer
You can send as many formats, fonts, pages, and graphics to the receiver
printer from the sender printer as you need, either all at once or only selected
items. Before performing any of the following procedures, you must have
prepared both the sender and receiver printers.
Sending Fonts, Pages, Formats, and Graphics
This procedure explains how to send different combinations of pages, formats,
fonts, and graphics.
To download fonts, pages, formats, and graphics
1. On the sender, press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
SELECTIVE TRANS
SEND ALL
2. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
SEND ALL
EXECUTE TEST
3. Press [ENTER] to download the data to the receiver. While downloading
the display shows:
TRANSFERRING
4. When the downloading process is complete, the display on the sender
shows the following:
SEND ALL
EXECUTE TEST
5. On the receiver printer, press [ONLINE/OFFLINE] to show the ONLINE
READY display. The transfer is now complete. You can detach the receiver
and prepare another printer to receive the data.
8-10
Special Procedures
8
Sending Only Fonts, Pages, Formats, or Graphics
You can download only one set of fonts, pages, formats, or graphics to the
receiver printer, or you can download all fonts, pages, formats, or graphics. In
this example, only pages are being sent.
To download fonts, pages, formats, or graphics
1. On the sender, press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows the item you are
sending, as in the example below:
SELECTIVE TRANS
SEND PAGE
2. Press [SELECT]. The display shows the lowest number:
SEND PAGE
0
3. Follow either the procedure for downloading all versions of the item, or the
one for downloading select versions below.
Downloading All Versions
1. Press [↑] or [↓] until you see ALL:
SEND PAGE
ALL
2. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
PAGE ALL
EXECUTE TEST
3. Press [ENTER] to download. While downloading, the display shows:
TRANSFERRING
4. When downloading is complete, the sender’s display shows:
PAGE ALL
EXECUTE TEST
Downloading Specified Versions
1. To download a particular version of the item, press [↑] or [↓] until the
number you wish to download appears, and then press [SELECT]. The
display shows the number:
SEND PAGE
4
8-11
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
2. Press [SELECT]. The display prompts you for a number to assign in the
receiver:
TO PAGE
1
Note: In this example, the display is asking you which number to assign to this
page once it is on the receiver printer.
3. Press [↑] or [↓] until you see the number you are assigning. Then press
[SELECT]. The display shows the assigned number:
PAGE 4 TO 1
EXECUTE TEST
4. Press [ENTER] to download the item. In this example, you are
downloading page 4 from the sender printer to the receiver, where it is
page 1. While downloading, the sender’s display shows:
TRANSFERRING
5. When downloading is complete, the sender’s display shows:
EXECUTE TEST
You have finished downloading. You can download another item, or
disconnect the receiver and download to new receiver.
Setting Maximum Print Speed
The 4400 printer has the ability to print up to 10 inches per second (ips). You
need to decide what print speed produces the highest quality labels for your
application. For instance, if you decide that your printer operates best at 7.0 ips
or lower, you may want to set the maximum print speed to 7.0 ips. Doing this
enables the operator to print at any speed up to, but not surpassing, 7.0 ips.
Only selected media can be used for high speed printing. Please consult your
Intermec Customer Service representative before deciding to use high print
speeds.
Note: The 4400 printer with the 6.5 mil printhead has a maximum print speed of 8.5
ips.
Print speeds above 6.0 ips do not appear on the display under “Print Speed”
unless you have set the “Max Print Speed” above 6.0 ips from the control
panel. The only way to set the Max Print Speed in the Install menu is from the
control panel.
8-12
Special Procedures
8
Note: Setting the Max Print Speed does not limit the print speed that you can select. It
only limits the range of the selections from the control panel. By sending the <SI>S
configuration command from the host, you can set any print speed up to 10 ips.
However, if you use the control panel to scroll to another print speed, you cannot
return to a speed above 6.0 ips without again sending the <SI>S command.
To set the maximum print speed
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display.
2. Press [MENU]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows the following:
OFFLINE
INSTALL MENU
3. Press [SELECT]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
INSTALL MENU
MAX PRINT SPEED
4. Press [SELECT] to enter the Max Print Speed menu.
5. Press [↑] or [↓] to select from values of 2.5 ips to 10 ips.
6. Press [ENTER] at the desired print speed for your application. The display
shows the current setting with an asterisk (*) as in the example below:
MAX PRINT SPEED
6.5 INCH/SECOND*
7. Press [CONTINUE] to return to the OFFLINE READY screen.
Installing Options
This is a special procedure to be done only if the option software drivers are
unloaded. This can happen if you use Memory Reset to set the configuration
parameters back to their default values.
Note: Enabling or disabling options does not unload the software drivers. After you
install an option, be sure to enable the option.
Printer options such as self-strip and cutter are installed at the factory. These
options are controlled by software drivers that reside in the printer’s internal
software. If the software driver is unloaded, the option cannot function
properly, and the enable/disable commands for your options will not appear
in the Configuration menu.
The software drivers will be unloaded if you use the memory reset command
to reset the configuration parameters. This procedure for loading options is
provided in case you use memory reset or the options software drivers are
unloaded by any other means.
8-13
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Installing an option software driver is different than the option enable/disable
commands in the Configuration menu, since the option is fully installed, not
just enabled or disabled.
Note: It is important to load only those software drivers for the options with which
your printer was configured.
Options Software Drivers
This table lists the options software drivers. Default values are in bold.
Command
Selections
External Options
None, Self-Strip, Cutter
Loading Options
You do not need to do this procedure if the driver is installed, but disabled.
To load options
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display.
2. Press [MENU]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
OFFLINE
INSTALL MENU
3. Press [SELECT]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows:
INSTALL MENU
OPTIONS
4. Press [SELECT] to enter the options menu.
5. Press [↑] or [↓] to choose external options.
6. Press [SELECT] at the type of option you are installing. The display shows
the current setting with an asterisk (*) as in the example below:
EXTERNAL
NONE*
7. Press [↑] or [↓] until you see the option you are installing, and then press
[ENTER] to move the asterisk (*) next to the selection as shown below:
EXTERNAL
SELF-STRIP*
8. To load another type of option, press [MENU] and return to Step 4. Press
[CONTINUE] to return to the OFFLINE READY screen.
8-14
9
Troubleshooting
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Troubleshooting
9
This chapter provides some information for troubleshooting error messages that may
appear on the printer control panel display, as well as certain problems you may have
with your printer.
About Troubleshooting
Your printer is designed to operate reliably under harsh conditions. However,
you may still encounter error messages. Most of the errors you encounter can
be easily fixed and you will not need to have the printer inoperable for long.
If you encounter a problem with the printer, try the following:
•
Check the display for an error message.
•
If there is an error message on the display, find it in the table under “Error
Messages” in this chapter and follow the instructions.
•
If the display does not show an error message, try to locate the symptom in
the tables under “Printer Operation Problems” or “Print Quality Problems”
later in this chapter and follow the instructions.
•
Clean the printer components and check all connections.
If the problem persists, contact your Intermec service representative.
9-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Printer Operation Problems
If your printer is not operating correctly, try locating the problem in the table
below:
Symptom
Cause
Solution
No power or
power loss
AC power cable is damaged or
disconnected.
Make sure the power cable is plugged
into both the printer and an outlet or
power strip. Replace the cable if it is
damaged.
Printer main power fuse is burnt out.
Replace the fuse. Refer to Chapter 10.
Media is sticking to the paper path.
Clear any extraneous material from the
paper path and clean it thoroughly.
Printer is out of media.
Load new media. Refer to Chapter 4.
Label gap or label mark sensors are dirty.
Clean label sensors. Refer to Chapter 10.
Label stock is loaded incorrectly.
Check the paper path. Refer to Chapter
10.
Label Stock command is not set for your
media.
Change Label Stock setting to match the
media you are using. Refer to Chapter 5.
Image bands or print speed incorrectly
set (and are not recovered when printer
aborted).
Change the Image Bands or Print Speed
settings. Refer to Chapter 5.
Printer has aborted and print speed and
image bands were reset.
Change the Image Bands or Print Speed
settings. Refer to Chapter 5.
Labels stop
indexing
Printer slows
down
9-4
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Troubleshooting
9
Print Quality Problems
If your labels are not being printed properly, check the following table to locate
the symptom and correct the problem.
Symptom
Cause
Solution
Control panel
does not access
menus
Security command set to restrict access
to menus.
Turn the printer off, then hold down the
[FEED/RELOAD] key while turning it
on to bypass security levels. Refer to
Chapter 8.
Blotches on labels
Dirty printhead.
Clean the printhead. Refer to Chapter 10.
Dirty paper path.
Clean the paper path. Refer to Chapter
10.
Poor quality label or ribbon stock.
Contact your Intermec representative for
suggestions on proper media or ribbons
for your printing requirements.
Sensitivity rating or dark adjust is
incorrectly set.
Change sensitivity rating to match the
type of media you are using (refer to
Chapter 4). If sensitivity is set correctly,
try changing the Dark Adjust command.
Dirty printhead.
Clean the printhead. Refer to Chapter 10.
Printhead Pressure incorrectly set.
Change the pressure to the other setting.
Refer to Chapter 5.
Poor quality label or ribbon stock.
Contact your Intermec representative for
suggestions on proper media or ribbons
for your printing requirements.
The printhead adjustment lever is not
positioned correctly.
Reposition the printhead adjustment
lever to the default position (vertical).
Print goes off the
side of the label
Label Width command incorrectly set.
Change Label Width setting. Refer to
Chapter 5.
Print is too far
forward or too far
back
Forms Adjust command incorrectly set.
Reset Forms Adjust. Refer to Chapter 4.
Labels are not
stopping at the
right point to be
removed
Label Rest Point command incorrectly
set.
Adjust the Label Rest Point. Refer to
Chapter 4.
Printing is too
light or too dark
9-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Communication Problems
If your printer is not receiving downloaded data or you cannot reach a certain
menu on the control panel, try the solutions in the following table.
Symptom
Cause
Solution
Printer does not
communicate with
host
Printer is offline.
Press [ONLINE/OFFLINE] on the
control panel.
Main Port or Auxiliary Port commands
incorrectly set.
Make sure printer port settings match
those of the host. Review port settings in
the control panel, or print a user-defined
configuration test label.
Damaged or incorrect I/O cable.
Check the connections at both ends or
replace the cable. Refer to Chapter 2.
Error Messages
Most of the problems you will encounter will generate an error message and
cause the Alert light to flash. When this happens, find the message in the table
below and follow the instructions to fix the problem.
Error Message
Problem
Solution
+12 vdc error
Power supply output voltage is not
within the acceptable operating range.
Shut off the printer. Contact your
Intermec service representative.
+24 vdc error
Power supply output voltage is not
within the acceptable operating range.
Shut off the printer. Contact your
Intermec service representative.
80186 error
The printer’s microprocessors are not
communicating. Printing stops and the
control panel locks up. When the printer
power is cycled, this message appears.
Cycle the power again. If the message
reappears, turn off the printer and
contact your Intermec service
representative.
80186 ram
error
The printer’s main microprocessor
cannot access RAM. Printing stops and
the control panel locks up. When the
printer power is cycled, this message
appears.
Cycle the printer power again. If the
message reappears, turn off the printer
and contact your Intermec service
representative.
9-6
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Troubleshooting
9
Error Message
Problem
Solution
80186 rom
error
The printer’s main microprocessor
cannot access ROM. Printing stops and
the control panel locks up. When the
printer power is cycled, this message
appears.
Cycle the power again. If the message
reappears, turn off the printer and
contact your Intermec service
representative.
80960 ram
error
One of the printer’s microprocessors
cannot access RAM. Printing stops and
the control panel locks up. When the
printer power is cycled, this message
appears.
Cycle the printer power again. If the
message reappears, turn off the printer
and contact your Intermec service
representative.
80960 rom
error
One of the printer’s microprocessors
cannot access ROM. Printing stops and
the control panel locks up. When the
printer power is cycled, this message
appears.
Cycle the printer power again. If the
message reappears, turn off the printer
and contact your Intermec service
representative.
ac volts low
There is not enough voltage reaching the
printer through the AC power cord.
Test the line voltage. If sufficient voltage
is reaching the printer, then the problem
is internal to the printer and you should
contact your Intermec service
representative. If the printer is not
receiving sufficient voltage, replace the
power cord.
ambient temp
sensor fault
The Ambient Temperature Sensor is
disconnected or not working properly.
The printer will still operate but you
cannot clear the alert. Contact your
Intermec representative.
calls fault
The printer microprocessor has detected
an internal fault.
Call your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
checksum error
Portions or all of the static memory were
found to be corrupted and were reset.
Some or all of the fonts, UDCs, formats,
configuration settings, etc., may have
been lost.
Call your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
9-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Error Message
Problem
Solution
Communications
error
Printer is not communicating with the
host computer.
Make sure the host is running and all the
connections are intact. Press
[CONTINUE] to clear the error.
cutter fault
The Cutter is not operating properly.
Check to see the cutter is properly
maintained and connected. Press
[FEED/RELOAD] to clear the error.
cutter not
connected
The Cutter is enabled from the control
panel but not connected.
If you are not using the cutter, disable
the cutter command (refer to Chapter 7).
Otherwise, check the connections
between the Cutter and the printer. Press
[CONTINUE] to clear the error.
Float fault
The printer microprocessor has detected
an internal fault.
Call your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
head lift
fault
The printhead mechanism has jammed
and the printhead cannot lift between
labels.
Open the printer manually (Refer to
Chapter 4). Proceed to close the cover
and press [FEED/RELOAD]. If this does
not work, contact an Intermec
representative.
image rate
error
Image Buffer and/or Print Speed settings
are not within the acceptable range for
the label.
Change the Image Buffer and/or Print
Speed settings. Refer to Chapter 5 for
information on optimizing these settings.
Press [CONTINUE] to clear the error.
increase
number of
image bands
You haven’t set enough image bands to
process the label.
Press [CONTINUE] to clear the error.
Increase the number of image bands.
machine fault
The printer microprocessor has detected
an internal fault.
Call your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
math fault
The printer microprocessor has detected
an internal fault.
Call your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
9-8
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Troubleshooting
9
Error Message
Problem
Solution
media alert
This message appears when the Media
Alert feature has been enabled and the
media supply needs to be replenished.
Replenish the media supply. Refer to
Chapter 4. To disable this feature, refer
to Chapter 5. Press [FEED/RELOAD] to
clear this warning.
memory reset
Portions or all of the static memory were
found to be corrupted and were reset.
Some or all of the fonts, UDCs, formats,
configuration settings, etc., may have
been lost.
Call your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
Operation
fault
The printer microprocessor has detected
an internal fault.
Call your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
overflow error
The five overflow error messages are
described below. Press [CONTINUE] to
clear the alert.
Problem
Solution
32
Non-immediate command or data
received with full buffer.
Resend message after buffer has cleared.
37
Not enough room in the printer memory
to print the label format. The format fits
into memory but there is not enough
memory left to print.
Reduce the format complexity by
deleting fields or decreasing the amount
of data.
42
Not enough room in the printer memory
to store the format.
Delete any formats, fonts, or graphics
that you no longer need. If the format
still does not fit, delete a few fields or
other data from the format.
Note: To see how much printer memory is
available, enter <ESC>m at the host.
43
Too many fields in the label format.
Delete some fields, or reduce the number
of characters in the fields.
53
Not enough room for graphic or userdefined font in the label format.
Delete any formats, fonts, or graphics
that you no longer need. If there is still
not enough room, reduce the size of the
font or graphic.
9-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Error Message
Problem
Solution
paper fault
You are out of media, there is a jam in
the paper path, or the printer cannot find
a label or index marker in the expected
place.
Open the printer and check the paper
path (refer to Chapter 4). Make sure the
Label Stock and Label Length parameters
are correct (refer to Chapter 5). Press
[FEED/RELOAD] to clear the alert.
paper path
open
The printer is open or the ribbon access
door is not properly closed.
Make sure the printer is closed, the
ribbon access door is installed correctly,
and the knob is in the horizontal
position. Press [FEED/RELOAD] to clear
the message.
PARAMETER
error
The four parameter errors are listed
below. Press [CONTINUE] to clear the
alert.
Problem
Solution
Invalid start or stop characters.
Verify start and stop characters in the
label format.
11
Invalid data characters.
Verify data characters in label format.
36
Invalid or undefined format or page
number.
Verify that the page numbers are between
0 and 9 and the format numbers are
between 0 and 19.
38
Invalid or undefined field number.
Verify the field number in the label
format.
printhead cold
The printhead is too cold to print
properly.
Wait for the printhead to heat up. At the
right temperature printing starts
automatically and the alert clears. If the
printer takes too long to heat up, contact
your Intermec representative.
printhead hot
The printhead is too hot to print.
Wait while the printhead cools. At the
right temperature, printing starts and the
alert clears. If the printer takes too long
to cool, or continues to overheat, contact
your Intermec representative.
printhead temp
sensor fault
The temperature sensor for the printhead
is not working or is disconnected.
The printer will continue to print, but
you cannot clear the alert. Contact your
Intermec representative.
8
9-10
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Troubleshooting
9
Error Message
Problem
Solution
printhead
TESTED OUT OF
RANGE
Some of the elements in the printhead are
not within the acceptable temperature
range.
If printing has stopped but your labels
are satisfactory, you can continue
printing by setting the Printhead Test
command in the Configuration menu to
WARN - CONTINUE. If the label quality
becomes too poor, you may need to
replace the printhead. To adjust the test,
see “About the Printhead Test” in
Chapter 5.
RANGE error
The six range errors are listed on the next
page. Press [CONTINUE] to clear the
alert.
Problem
Solution
12
Data count has been exceeded.
Reduce the amount of data entered into
this field or increase the field’s maximum
data (up to 200).
21
Quantity or batch count is out of range.
Quantity of labels should be between 1
and 9999 and there should be 1-9999
batches of labels.
22
Increment or Decrement quantity is out
of range.
Quantity should be between 1 and 9999.
23
Intercharacter delay or message delay is
out of range.
Delay should be between 0 and 9999.
52
Invalid font/graphic height, width, or
intercharacter gap.
Font or graphic height and width should
be between 1 and 600. Intercharacter gap
should be between 0 and 199 dots.
RECEIVER ERROR
If you are using the Cloning or Selective
Transfer commands, the Receiver printer
is not receiving the information from the
Sender.
Make sure the Receiver printer is turned
on and set up correctly for receiving
information from the Sender. Check all
connections between the Receiver and
the Sender printers.
ribbon fault
You are out of thermal transfer ribbon or
it is jammed.
Clear the jam or replenish the ribbon
stock (refer to Chapter 4). Press
[FEED/RELOAD] to clear the alert.
ROM VERSION
MISMATCH
You do not have the same version of
software for the two processors. The
printer will not power up.
Contact your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
9-11
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Error Message
Problem
Solution
self-strip not
connected
The self-strip option is not connected.
Make sure the self-strip is connected
properly, or disable the option (refer to
Chapter 5). Press [FEED/RELOAD] to
clear the alert.
sender error
If you are using the cloning or selective
transfer commands, the Sender printer is
not set up properly to send information
to the Receiver.
Check all connections between the
Sender and the Receiver printers. Make
sure the Sender printer is set up correctly
for transmitting information to the
Receiver.
state fault
The printer microprocessor has detected
an internal fault.
Call your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
struct fault
The printer microprocessor has detected
an internal fault.
Call your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
SYNTAX ERROR
The eight Syntax Error messages are
listed below. See Chapters 6 and 7 for
information on command syntax. In all
cases, press [CONTINUE] to clear the
alert.
Problem
Solution
24
Missing preamble or postamble data.
Delete the setup for preamble or
postamble data, or include the data.
33
Invalid field delimiter. Either a start or
end character is missing or they are
different types.
Check for all pairs of field delimiters and
make sure both are numeric, or both are
alphanumeric.
34
Invalid escape command.
Correct the escape command syntax.
35
Invalid shift command.
Correct the shift command syntax.
44
Semicolon (;) missing after <ESC>P.
If data follows <ESC>P you must insert a
semicolon (;) to separate commands.
46
Statement does not make sense.
Check the statement syntax.
54
Invalid UDC command.
Correct the UDC command syntax.
trace fault
The printer microprocessor has detected
an internal fault.
Call your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
type fault
The printer microprocessor has detected
an internal fault.
Call your Intermec Product Support
Representative.
9-12
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Troubleshooting
9
Error Codes
The following list describes the error codes that are transmitted in response to
the <BEL> command. After a <BEL> command is sent, the error code is cleared
immediately after it is transmitted. Any subsequent <BEL> commands
received return a 00.
Error Code
Description
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
08
11
12
13
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
41
42
43
46
52
53
54
No error
Invalid bar code check character
Invalid number of bar code characters (Code UPC/EAN)
Bar code check character within numeric field marks
Supplemental delimiter within numeric field marks (Code UPC/EAN)
Invalid supplemental character count (Code UPC/EAN)
More than one supplemental delimiter (Code UPC/EAN)
Invalid start/stop characters (Codabar)
Invalid bar code data
Data count exceeded
Data is being entered into a non-data entry field
Quantity or batch count out of range
Field increment or decrement out of range
Intercharacter/message delay out of range
Missing preamble or postamble data
Invalid format transmission syntax
Invalid page transmission syntax
Invalid font transmission syntax
Invalid UDC transmission syntax
Non-immediate command or data received after buffer is full
Invalid field marks
Invalid escape command
Invalid data shift command
Invalid or undefined format number
Insufficient room in RAM to print format
Invalid or undefined field number
Syntax error for Program Commands
Insufficient room in RAM to store format
Too many fields
Undefined statement
Invalid UDC or UDF bitmap cell height/width or intercharacter space
Insufficient room in RAM to store UDC or UDF
Invalid UDC command syntax
9-13
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Using the Print Tests
If you are changing your label formats, there are several tests that print out
formats, pages of formats, graphics, and fonts that are currently stored in the
printer’s memory. These tests are useful for reviewing your design options.
The following table shows the available print tests for pages, formats, fonts,
and graphics. See the circle on the foldout page to locate these tests in the
Service menu.
Command
Selections
Print Page
Print 1 to 99 copies of any page number (0 through 9), or print
all pages.
Print Formats
Print 1 to 99 copies of any format number (0 through 19), or
print all formats.
Print Fonts
Print any font number (0 through 25), or print all fonts.
Print Graphics
Print any graphic number (0 through 99), or print all graphics.
Use the following procedure to print examples of any page, format, font, or
graphic, as shown in the preceding table. You can also print all examples of
any item if you wish. For pages and formats, you are prompted to select a
quantity before executing the test (unless you chose all pages or all formats).
This quantity is the number of copies you want of the chosen page or format.
To print tests
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display.
2. Press [MENU]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until you reach the Service menu as
shown below:
OFFLINE
SERVICE MENU
3. Press [SELECT] to enter the Service menu. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display
shows the item you want to print (in this example you are printing a page).
SERVICE MENU
PRINT PAGE
4. Press [SELECT]. The first page you define appears in the display. For
example, if the first page defined is page 1, the display shows the
following:
PRINT PAGE
1
9-14
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Troubleshooting
9
5. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display shows the number of the page you want to
print.
Note: You can select all pages by pressing [↓] to select ALL.
PRINT PAGE
ALL
6. Press [SELECT]. This display shows one of the following prompts:
•
If you selected all pages, all formats, or any selection of fonts or
graphics, the display shows:
PAGE ALL
EXECUTE TEST
•
If you selected a specific page or format, the display shown below
appears. Press [↑] or [↓] until you reach the number of copies of the
selected page or font you want to print, and then press [SELECT].
PAGE QUANTITY
1
7. Press [ENTER] at the EXECUTE TEST prompt to print.
Printing a Copy of the Data From the Host
If you need to see a hard copy of the data being sent to the printer, you can set
the printer to print out all data and commands it receives from the host.
This feature is available through the Data Line Print command in the Service
menu. You have two selections for Data Line Print:
Enabled The printer prints all ASCII characters it receives from the host,
including control characters. The corresponding hexadecimal code is printed
underneath each character.
Disabled
The printer prints normally. This is the default setting.
To enable or disable Data Line Print
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display.
2. Press [MENU] to enter the main menu. Press [↑] or [↓] until you reach the
Service menu.
3. Press [SELECT] to enter the Service menu. Press [↑] or [↓] until the display
shows:
SERVICE MENU
DATA LINE PRINT
9-15
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
DATA LINE PRINT
DISABLED*
5. Press [↑] or [↓] to change to Enabled, and then press [ENTER] to move the
asterisk next to the new selection. The display shows:
DATA LINE PRINT
ENABLED*
The printer will now print characters received from the host.
The data line print automatically returns to DISABLED after you exit this
menu. Press [ONLINE/OFFLINE] to return to normal printing.
Note: If the [FEED/RELOAD] key is pressed while Data Line Print is enabled, the
software version number will be transmitted enabling the user to perform a loop-back
test at the communications port.
Calibrating Label Sensors
If the label sensors are not locating the beginning and ends of your labels
properly, they can be calibrated with the Calibrate Sensor command.
Note: The sensors may not work if they need cleaning. Follow the procedures in
Chapter 10 before calibrating.
To calibrate your label sensors
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display.
2. Press [MENU]. Proceed to press [↑] or [↓] until you see:
OFFLINE READY
SERVICE MENU
3. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
SERVICE MENU
PRINT PAGE
4. Press [↑] or [↓] until you see:
SERVICE MENU
CALIBRATE SENSOR
5. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
CALIBRATE SENSOR
GAP
9-16
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Troubleshooting
9
6. If you are using gapped media, press [ENTER]. If you are using marked
media, press [↑] or [↓] to choose Mark, and then press [ENTER]. The
display shows:
HOLD FEED KEY
FOR TWO LABELS
7. Hold down the [FEED/RELOAD] key while the printer feeds two labels
forward. The display shows:
CALIBRATE SENSOR
GAP
After the labels are forwarded, the label sensors are calibrated. Press
[CONTINUE] to return to the READY display.
Increasing Available Memory
If you need to increase the amount of memory available in your printer, you
can use one of the Service memory reset menus to clear fonts/graphics or
pages/formats stored in battery backed RAM. Using either of these commands
will destroy any data that you have previously downloaded. It is necessary to
redownload any important fonts/graphics or pages/formats that you have just
cleared from memory.
To increase available memory
1. Start at the OFFLINE READY display.
2. Press [MENU]. Then press [↑] or [↓] until you see the following display:
OFFLINE
SERVICE MENU
3. Press [↑] until the display shows:
SERVICE MENU
MEMORY RESET
4. Press [SELECT]. The display shows:
MEMORY RESET
ALL
5. Press [↓] until the display shows:
MEMORY RESET
FONTS/GRAPHICS
or:
MEMORY RESET
PAGES/FORMATS
6. Press [ENTER] to clear fonts/graphics or pages/formats.
9-17
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Print Quality
The 4400 printer was designed and configured at the factory to provide
maximum print quality for both direct thermal and thermal transfer media.
It is important that you select the proper media when printing at higher
speeds. Using good quality media reduces the occurrence of images that fade
or bleed. If you want to print quality labels at higher print speeds, you must
select media with low reaction or release imaging temperatures. Printing at
lower speeds produces the highest quality labels. Please consult your Intermec
service representative to decide the proper media for your application.
There are many factors that need to be taken into account before you can
achieve maximum print quality. These factors are addressed in the sections
that follow.
Media Selection
The choice of media is one of the most important decisions you can make
concerning print quality. The 4400 printer supports a wide selection of both
direct thermal and thermal transfer media. To achieve optimum performance in
your application, you must evaluate requirements such as print speed and
environmental conditions.
Please consult your Intermec service representative to ensure the selection of
the proper media for your individual application. A complete list of available
media is included in the Media Envelope that is shipped with your printer.
Sensitivity
Each print element on the 4400 printer is heated individually. Different
temperatures are required for various types of media. There is a three-digit
sensitivity number printed on each media roll or box that specifies a heating
schedule optimized for print speed and print history. Each heating schedule is
unique due to different media chemistries and manufacturing processes.
Assorted brands of direct thermal media contain many different types of dyes,
coating, and base paper. These heating schedules have been developed to
produce the highest possible ANSI print quality for bar codes.
Before you load media into the printer, check to see that the sensitivity rating
for the media matches the rating set in the printer. When you set the sensitivity
in the printer to match the rating for your media, the amount of energy the
printhead uses is adjusted to a value suitable for your media. Refer to “Setting
the Media Sensitivity Number,” in Chapter 4 for more information.
Note: Ensure that the Sensitivity rating is set before you alter the dark adjust.
9-18
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Troubleshooting
9
Print Speed
The print speed you select greatly affects the printed image. Therefore, it is
important to select the proper media when printing at higher speeds. The
highest quality labels are produced at lower speeds. Optimal print quality for
most direct thermal media is achieved at speeds below 3.5 ips.
In order to print labels as quickly as possible, you must adjust the print speed
in conjunction with the number of image bands. The Print Speed and Image
Band settings determine the rate at which the printer processes the images of
your labels. This in turn affects the speed of the entire printing process. Refer to
“Optimizing the Print Speed and Image Bands” in Chapter 5.
In order to achieve optimal print quality at speeds greater than 6.0 ips, you
may need to fine-tune the printer controls. At higher print speeds, it is
important to properly set the sensitivity number and the dark adjust. If
necessary, further adjustment of controls such as the printhead adjustment
lever, altering of the format, and changing printhead pressure can improve
print quality.
Formats
The format can be altered to improve print quality and print speed. At high
speeds, the best quality bar codes are produced when the drag orientation
(perpendicular to paper motion) is used. For more information on formats,
please refer to Chapter 6, “Designing Labels and Using Commands.”
Printhead Pressure
Raising the printhead pressure increases the force and area contact between the
printhead and the media. The 4400 printer has two head pressure settings: high
and low. Low printhead pressure is recommended for most applications.
However, we recommend using high printhead pressure for tag stock. Please
contact your Intermec service representative for specific information.
Dark Adjust
The dark adjust feature allows fine tuning of energy levels to optimize print
quality. However, if you set too high of a darkness level, you may reduce
printhead life. We recommend that you initially set the sensitivity rating and
leave the dark adjust at zero. Only use the dark adjust as the printhead wears,
for media variations from lot to lot, or for printhead resistance variations.
Refer to “Setting the Dark Adjust” in Chapter 4 for more information.
Note: It is important to enter the sensitivity rating before you adjust the level of the
darkness.
9-19
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Printhead Adjustment Lever
The location of the heating elements on the top of the platen roller can be
critical in achieving optimal print quality. The 4400 printer contains a printhead
adjustment lever inside of the printer cover that can be used to adjust the
heating element relative to the platen roller. The printhead adjustment lever
moves the heating element location both forward and backward from the top of
the platen roller. The following figure illustrates where you can find the
printhead adjustment lever.
Using the Printhead Adjustment Lever
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
ER
T
ME
EN
NU
TE
R
0P
EN
PO
WE
R
CO
NT
INU
E
FE
RE
ED
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LIN
OF
F LIN E
E
Printhead
Adjustment
Lever
4400-41
The printhead adjustment lever has seven settings. The default, or home
position, of the lever is vertical. Adjustments can be made by moving the lever
clockwise or counterclockwise. The lever allows flexibility in compensating for
variables such as media thickness, high print speed, and printhead
replacement.
9-20
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Troubleshooting
9
Note: Intermec does not recommend that you adjust the printhead lever. It is meant for
use by Intermec Service Technicians as a fine-tuning control when replacing the
printhead.
Printhead Aging
Print element wear is common in thermal printers. Over the life of a printhead,
wear can result in a change of resistance in the print elements. The change in
element resistance affects the print quality. If needed, the change in resistance
can be compensated for by using the Dark Adjust command. Use the Printhead
Resistance Test in Chapter 5 to warn you when the printhead elements are
beginning to wear out.
9-21
10
Routine Maintenance
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Routine Maintenance
10
This chapter explains how to maintain the printer, inspect the printer work
environment and system connections, and clean each printer component.
About Printer Maintenance
The printer is designed to withstand harsh environments but it should be
cleaned on a regular basis to keep it running at full capacity, especially if it is
exposed to debris.
For information on replenishing media or ribbon, clearing jams and other
online maintenance procedures, refer to Chapter 4.
Inspecting the Printer
Inspect the printer and the rest of your data collection system on a regular
basis. Your inspections should include the following:
•
Make sure the printer is properly grounded.
•
Inspect the work environment. Large electric motors, welders, and
switching equipment can affect printer performance. See Chapter 2,
“Installing the Printer,” for guidelines on appropriate environments.
•
Keep the printer away from liquids.
•
Check the network regularly for loose wires or poorly installed connections.
Be sure to replace corroded wires.
Components to Maintain
Clean your printer regularly to maintain the quality of your labels and extend
the life of your printer. The following table contains suggestions for cleaning
the printer.
To clean the printer effectively and safely use the following items: isopropyl
alcohol, a cleaning brush, cotton swabs, and a clean lint-free cloth.
Printer Component
Maintenance Period
Printhead
Inspect after every roll of media. Clean after every five rolls of
media.
Platen Roller and Tear Bar
Label Gap and Label Mark Sensors
Media Pathway and Edge Guides
Clean after every ten rolls of media. If you are using hi-tack
adhesive you must clean after every roll of media. If you are
using tag stock or continuous media, you should clean after
every five rolls of media.
Printer Cover
Clean as necessary.
10-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Components to Maintain
Printer
Cover
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
ALE
ME
EN
NU
TE
RT
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WER
NTI
NU
E
FE
ED
RE
ON
LO
AD
LIN
E
ON
LIN
OF
FL E
INE
Printhead
Media
Pathway
Platen Roller
Edge
Guides
Tear Bar
4400-61B
Cleaning the Printer
The following procedures tell you how to access the printer components and
clean them without causing any damage.
Note: Turn off and unplug the printer before cleaning any components. The following
procedures include instructions for opening the printer without power.
10-4
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Routine Maintenance
10
Removing the Ribbon Access Door
To open the printer without power, it is necessary to remove the ribbon access
door.
To remove the ribbon access door
1. Turn off and unplug the printer.
2. Remove the Ribbon Access Door by turning the knob 1/4 turn
counterclockwise, and lifting the door away from the printer.
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
ER
T
MEN
EN
U
TE
R
0P
EN
PO
WE
R
CO
NT
INUE
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-27B
Opening the Printer
1. Press down on the manual cover release and lift the cover.
2. Remove the media and thermal transfer ribbon.
10-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Opening the Printer
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
ER
T
MEN
EN
U
TE
R
0P
EN
PO
WE
R
CO
NT
INUE
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-44B
Cleaning the Printer Case
Clean the case with a lint-free cloth and isopropyl alcohol as necessary to
remove dust from cooling vents. If the vents become obstructed, the printer
may overheat, which can result in pauses while printing labels and damage to
the electronic circuitry inside the printer.
Cleaning the Printhead
Cleaning media debris from the printhead maintains close contact between the
media and printhead, which provides good print quality. The printhead should
be cleaned after every five rolls of media. Always clean the printhead
immediately if a label jams in the printer.
To clean the printhead, follow the steps under “Opening the Printer.” Then use
a cotton swab or a clean, lint-free cloth and isopropyl alcohol to clean the
printhead. Be persistent. It may take a long time to remove label adhesive.
10-6
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Routine Maintenance
10
Caution
Do not use sharp objects such as knives or screwdrivers to scrape the
printhead clean. Cleaning with sharp objects will damage the printhead. Clean
with a cotton swab, or a clean, lint-free cloth and isopropyl alcohol.
Conseil
N'utilisez pas d'objets pointus tels que couteaux ou tournevis pour nettoyer la
tête d'impression. Nettoyer avec des objets pointus endommagera la tête
d'impression. Nettoyez-la avec de la ouate ou avec un linge propre et libre de
peluches, humecté avec de l'alcool d'isopropyl.
®
CO
NT
INUE
RE
ON
LO
AD
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-62B
Cleaning the Platen Roller and Tear Bar
Cleaning the platen roller and tear bar maintains even contact between the
media and the printhead.
To clean these items
1. Follow the steps under “Opening the Printer.”
2. Clean the platen roller with a brush and isopropyl alcohol. Rotate the roller
to clean all areas.
10-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Note: If you do not have a brush and isopropyl alcohol, use a label to clean the
platen roller. Place one end of the label on the roller and pull the label forward to
remove any debris. Repeat the process until the roller is clean.
3. Clean the tear bar with a brush and isopropyl alcohol.
Warning
Use extreme caution when cleaning the tear bar to avoid cutting yourself.
Avertissement
Lors du nettoyage de la barre coupante, prenez bien soin de ne pas vous couper.
Caution
Do not scrape the rubber platen roller. Scraping will gouge the roller and void
any applicable warranty. Gouged rollers must be replaced to maintain high
quality label printing.
Conseil
Ne grattez pas le rouleau caoutchouté. Gratter le rouleau gougera le
caoutchouc et annulera toute garantie applicable. Vous devez remplacer les
rouleaux gougés pour maintenir une haute qualité d'impression d'étiquettes.
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
ER
T
MEN
EN
U
TE
R
0P
EN
PO
WE
R
CO
NT
INUE
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-63B
10-8
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Routine Maintenance
10
Cleaning the Label Gap and Label Mark Sensors
The label gap and label mark sensors should be checked for debris and cleaned
after every ten rolls of media.
To clean the label sensors
1. Follow the procedures under “Opening the Printer.”
2. Clean both sensors with a brush and isopropyl alcohol. Be sure you clean
both the label gap sensor and the label mark sensor.
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
MEN
EN
ER
U
TE
T
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WE
NT
INUE
R
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-64B
Cleaning the Paper Path
The paper path should be checked for debris and cleaned after every ten rolls
of media. Cleaning media debris and dust from the paper path keeps the
printhead and platen roller clean as well. If debris spreads within the printhead
the print quality will be affected.
To clean the paper path
1. Follow the procedures under “Opening the Printer.”
10-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
ALE
ME
EN
NU
TE
RT
R
0P
EN
PO
CO
WER
NTI
NU
E
FE
RE
ED
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LI
OFF NE
LIN
E
4400-65B
2. Clean the flat surfaces of the paper path with a clean, lint-free cloth and
isopropyl alcohol. Remove all traces of dust, paper, and adhesive.
Cleaning the Edge Guides
You should clean the edge guides to keep debris off the media surface and the
printhead where irregularities can spoil print quality. Cleaning the guides also
prevents the media from skewing, or mistracking as it travels through the
paper path which can smear images and print off the label edge. Always clean
the edge guides immediately if a label jams in the printer.
To clean the edge guides
1. Follow the procedures under “Opening the Printer.”
2. Clean the edge guide using a lint-free cloth and isopropyl alcohol.
10-10
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Routine Maintenance
10
®
44
00
SE
LE
CT
AL
ER
T
MEN
EN
U
TE
R
0P
EN
PO
WE
R
CO
NT
INUE
FE
ED
RE
LO
AD
ON
LIN
E
ON
LINE
OF
F LI
NE
4400-66B
Replacing the Fuse
If the Power light does not come on when you turn on the printer, you need to
replace the main power fuse. You need the following items:
•
Fuse for 5A, 250V, Slo-Blo fuse, (either 3AG or 5x20mm)
•
Medium, straight slot screwdriver
Warning
Always disconnect the power cord before replacing the fuse. Failure to
disconnect the power cord may result in injury or death due to electric shock.
Avertissement
Débranchez toujours le cordon d'alimentation avant de remplacer la fusible. Si
vous ne débranchez pas de cordon d'alimentation, vous courrez le risque de
blessure ou de mort par électrocution.
To replace the fuse
1. Turn off and unplug the printer.
2. With the screwdriver, turn the fuse holder a 1/2 turn counterclockwise.
3. The spring-loaded fuse holder will pop out. Remove the fuse holder.
10-11
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
4. Remove the old fuse from the holder.
5. Install the new fuse into the holder.
6. With the screwdriver, press the fuse holder into place and turn it half a turn
clockwise or until it stops.
7. Install the power cord.
8. Turn on the printer. If it still does not receive power, contact your Intermec
representative.
4400-67
10-12
A
Appendix
Appendix
A
4400 Printer Specifications
The specifications for the 4400 printer are as follows. The 4400 Maintenance
Manual has details on printer performance and upkeep. Chapters 9 and 10 of
this manual contain troubleshooting and maintenance procedures for everyday
use.
Dimensions (no options installed)
Height
13.0 inches (33.0 cm)
Width
12.0 inches (30.5 cm) with roll supply
Weight
35.0 pounds (15.9 kg)
Length
21.5 inches (54.6 cm)
Electrical Requirements
Input Voltage
90 to 264 VAC
Frequency
48 to 62 Hz
Fuse
115 or 230 VAC
The printer has an auto-ranging power supply that automatically adjusts itself
to the line voltages within the range shown above when it is plugged in.
Power Usage
Typical usage
300 Watts
Typical usage is based on the amount of power required to print one label. This
usage holds true for low line of 90 VAC to high line of 140 VAC. The typical
usage of 300 Watts also applies to European power supplies.
Printing Method
The 4400 is capable of direct thermal (DT) printing, or thermal transfer (TTR)
printing using thermal transfer ribbon (TTR).
Printing Speed
Maximum
4400: 10 inches (254 mm) per second
4400 w/6.5 mil printhead: 8.5 inches (221 mm) per second
Minimum
4400: 2.5 inches (64 mm) per second
4400 w/6.5 mil printhead: 3.0 inches (76 mm) per second
A-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Printhead
Element
4400: 0.00492 inch (0.125 mm)
4400 w/6.5 mil printhead: 0.006575 inch (0.167 mm)
Width
4.4 inches (112 mm) maximum
Length
0.24 inch (6 mm) minimum, maximum is unlimited
Resolution
4400: 203 dpi (8 dots per mm)
4400 w/6.5 mil printhead: 152 dpi (6 dots per mm)
“X” dimensions:
4400: 10 mil to 50 mil (0.25 mm to 1.27 mm); 5 mil (0.13 mm) in
drag mode only
4400 w/6.5 mil printhead: 6.5 mil, or 0.165 mm, for all modes
Media Specifications
Roll
6,000 inches (152 m) maximum length
8.38 in (213 mm) maximum diameter
Core Size
3 inches (77 mm)
Label Length
0.24 inch (6 mm) to 24 inches (610 mm); fanfold, 19 inches
(483 mm) maximum
Label Width
2.5 inches (64 mm) to 5.1 inches (132 mm)
Thickness
0.003 inch (0.08 mm) to 0.010 inch (90.25 mm)
Ribbon Specifications
Roll
18,000 inches (457 m)
Widths
2.5 inches (64 mm)
3.5 inches (91 mm)
4.5 inches (114 mm)
Environment
A-4
Operating
32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
Storage
-4°F to 152°F (-20°C to 70°C)
Humidity
10% to 95% relative humidity
Appendix
A
Communications
Asynchronous RS-232C, RS-422, RS-485 interfaces
Serial ASCII code
Hardware (Ready/Busy) Flow Control
Software (XON/XOFF) Flow Control
Intermec Standard Block Protocol
Polling Mode D Protocol
Multi-Drop Protocol
Baud Rates: 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
Fonts and Graphics
Nine resident bitmap fonts (including OCR A and B), plus one resident smooth
outline font, scaleable up to 3 inches.
Fonts installed with PrintSet.
200 dpi graphics resolution
Character Sets
US ASCII
UK ASCII
German
Norwegian/Danish
Swedish/Finnish
Italian
French
Spanish
Swiss
7-bit and 8-bit ISO Character Sets
A-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Bar Code Symbologies
This section lists and describes the available bar code symbologies.
Code 39
Code 39 is the first alphanumeric symbology ever developed and is the
standard non-retail bar code. It is a discrete, self-checking symbology of
variable length and is used mostly by the automobile and medical industries.
Intermec printer support 3 different types of Code 39: 43 character Code 39, full
ASCII Code 39, and the 8646 compatible Code 39. The 8646 compatible version
only differs from the full ASCII version by four characters. The “$,” “%,” “/,”
and “+” are encoded as single characters instead of as “/D,” “/E,” “/O,” and
“/K.” The 8646 compatible version allows the 4400 printer to be backward
compatible with 86XX printers.
If you enter <ESC><SPACE> as data, the start and stop characters are printed.
Code 93
Introduced in 1983, Code 93 was specially designed to complement Code 39.
With the correct reading equipment, the two alphanumeric codes may be
interchanged throughout a system without making any changes to software.
Code 2 of 5
Code 2 of 5 is a straightforward numeric symbology developed in the late
1960s. It has been used for warehouse sorting systems, photofinishing
envelope identification, and for tracking sequentially numbered airline tickets.
All information is contained in the width of the bars; the spaces do not contain
information.
Interleaved 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5 is a high density, self-checking, continuous numeric
symbology, which has mainly been used in the distribution industry.
Interleaved 2 of 5 actually encodes two digits, one in the bars and one in the
spaces. A zero is added to character strings that are odd in length.
Codabar
Originally developed in 1972, Codabar is a numeric symbology most
commonly used in libraries, blood banks, and air parcel express applications.
A-6
Appendix
A
Valid start/stop characters range from “A” to “D” and from “a” to “d.” They
can be defined as part of the bar code field or downloaded as part of the print
data. Start/stop characters sent down with printer data override the characters
defined by the bar code field.
Code 11
Code 11 was developed in early 1977 to satisfy requirements for a very high
density, discrete numeric bar code. The most extensive application of Code 11
has been for labeling telecommunications equipment.
Code 128
Code 128 was introduced in 1981 as a very high density, alphanumeric
symbology. It is a variable length, continuous code that employs multiple
element widths.
In 86XX emulation mode, the Function 1 character is printed by entering
<SUB> 1. In Advanced mode, the Function 1 character is printed by entering
<SUB><SUB> 1. The characters for Function 2, 3, and 4 are represented in the
same way.
UCC-128 serial shipping container code automatically starts with subset C and
<FNC1>. It is a fixed length version of Code 128 allowing up to 19 numeric
characters to be entered. The first two characters are forced to zeros, and the
MOD 10 check digit is calculated and inserted before the standard Code 128
digit.
UPC
Universal Product Code (UPC) is a subset of EAN. It is a fixed length, numeric,
continuous symbology employing four element widths. Two common types of
UPC are Version A, which encodes 12 digits, and Version E, which encodes 6
digits. UPC has been used in the supermarket industry since 1973. UPC
supplemental code is intended for only periodical issue numbers.
EAN
The European Article Numbering system (abbreviated as EAN) is a numeric
superset of UPC. EAN has both a version that uses 8 digits and a version that
uses 13 digits. The version with 13 digits encodes the same number of bars as
12 digit UPC Version A, but the 13th digit is encoded into a parity pattern at
the left of the center guard bar.
A-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
The variable length option selects the UPC/EAN version by the number of
characters in the data field. The number of data characters and check characters
allowed for each version are:
EAN 8
check character
7 data + 1
EAN 13
check character
12 data + 1
UPC version A
check character
11 data + 1
UPC version E
check character
6 data + 1
UPC version D1
check character
13 data + 1
UPC version D2
check characters
18 data + 2
UPC version D3
check characters
22 data + 2
UPC version D4
check characters
25 data + 3
UPC version D5
check characters
29 data + 3
A period (“.”) is used to delimit the bar code data from the supplemental data.
Data to the right of the “.” is supplemental data; data to the left is bar code
data. The two or five digit supplemental can be added to any version of the
UPC/EAN code.
The flag 1 option only applies to EAN 8, EAN 13, and UPC version A. For EAN
13, enabling the flag 1 option prints the first character of the bar code
interpretive. For EAN 8 and UPC version A, enabling the flag 1 option moves
the first and last character of the bar code interpretive outside of the guard
bars.
POSTNET
The Postal Numeric Encoding Technique (POSTNET) uses binary digits,
represented as full bars and half bars, to provide a numeric bar code
symbology that is easily read and decoded by optical reading systems.
POSTNET provides both error detection and correction capabilities.
A-8
Appendix
A
2D Symbologies
2D symbologies provide a more efficient way of encoding data than standard
bar code symbologies. 2D symbologies use two dimensions to hold data
instead of one, allowing much more information to be stored in a smaller
amount of space. Your 4400 printer provides the capability for printing both
stacked and matrix 2D symbologies.
2D Stacked Symbologies
2D stacked symbologies (such as PDF 417, Code 16K, and Code 49) consist of
short linear segments stacked on top of each other. In addition to being able to
condense a large amount of information into the stacked format, PDF 417
provides an extensive error detection and correction option. Up to 510
characters can be recovered if they are lost due to an error in scanning or if the
label is damaged.
2D stacked symbologies can be scanned with a laser scanner or imaging device
that features 2D code scanning capability.
Code 16K
Introduced in 1988, Code 16K is an alphanumeric symbology similar to Code
49 in that it employs multiple rows (from 2 to 16). Each row is fixed length and
uses a mirror image of the Code 128 coding patterns.
<SUB> 1 is used to represent the Function 1 character in 86XX emulation
mode. In advanced mode, the Function 1 character is represented by entering
<SUB><SUB> 1. The characters for Functions 2, 3, and 4 are represented in the
same way.
If you want to produce a square symbol, specify a height magnification of 1 in
advanced mode.
Code 49
Code 49 is an alphanumeric symbology developed in 1987 as a means of
labeling very small objects. A Code 49 bar code contains from two to eight
adjacent rows, each separated by a one-module separator bar.
In emulation mode, <SUB> 1 is used to represent the Function 1 character. In
advanced mode, <SUB><SUB> 1 is used to represent the Function 1 character.
The characters for Functions 2 and 3 are represented in the same way.
If you want to produce a square symbol, specify a height magnification of 2 in
advanced mode. A square symbol is specified by a height magnification of 250
in emulation mode.
Only alphanumeric (0) and numeric (2) modes are supported.
A-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
PDF 417
PDF 417 is a stacked 2D symbology that provides the ability to scan across
rows of code. Each row consists of start/stop characters, row identifiers, and
symbol characters (called “codewords”). Each codeword consists of four bars
and four spaces and contain the actual data. In addition to being able to
condense a large amount of information into the stacked format, PDF 417
provides an extensive error detection and correction option. Up to 510
characters can be recovered if they are lost due to an error in scanning or if the
label is damaged. PDF 417 codes can be scanned with a laser scanner or
imaging device that features 2D code scanning capability.
2D Matrix Symbologies
2D matrix symbologies, such as Code One, use both the horizontal and vertical
axes to encode data even more efficiently than stacked symbologies. 2D matrix
codes are created as a matrix of square elements, with each element being
either white or black to encode data in a binary code. Extensive error detection
and correction codes are appended to 2D matrix symbologies, often
automatically.
2D matrix symbologies generally cannot be read with a laser scanner. Instead,
they are read by a digital imager that captures the entire symbol at once instead
of scanning each component individually. Since the components of 2D matrix
symbologies are decoded after the image is captured, they permit very fast
data collection.
Code One
Code One is a 2D matrix symbology that stores data directly in a matrix in a
checkerboard pattern. This matrix makes Code One especially useful for
applications such as small parts labels that do not provide sufficient space for
linear bar codes. Code One automatically generates error correction symbol
characters that are added to the matrix. In addition to data storage and error
correction symbols, each Code One symbol contains a set of horizontal lines in
the center, called a finder pattern, that helps readers quickly locate and identify
each symbol. Code One symbols also contain vertical reference bars to help
readers locate the relative positions of each data bit.
Code One symbols accommodate varying amounts of data using a different
method than other codes. Other codes adjust their size to fit the data exactly.
Code One symbols are divided into versions, with each version being a specific
size. Each version can accommodate an amount of data from one bit to the
maximum amount that will fit into that version. If more data is present than
the version can accommodate, the printer will not print the symbol.
A-10
Appendix
A
Code One symbols cannot be read with a laser scanner. Instead, they are read
by a digital imager which captures the entire symbol at once instead of
scanning each component individually. Since the components of each Code
One symbol are decoded after the image is captured, they permit very fast data
collection.
Maxicode
Maxicode is a fixed-size symbology that is made up of offset rows of hexagonal
elements arranged around a bullseye finder pattern. Each hexagon represents
one bit of information and is either black or white depending on the state of the
encoded data bit. United Parcel Service (UPS) Research and Development
developed Maxicode for the specific purpose of encoding information about a
parcel.
This symbology only encodes very specific data that is divided into the
following fields: a 5-digit zip code, a 4-digit zip code extension, a 3-digit
country code, a 3-digit class of service, and a string of uppercase letters,
numbers, or limited punctuation marks.
Printer Options
Listed below are some of the options available with the 4400 printer. Consult
your Intermec representative for a complete listing of options.
Self Strip
If you apply labels one at a time, as soon as they are printed, you can work
more quickly and easily using the Self-Strip option. With this option the printer
does not present a new label until you have removed the backing from the
previous one.
Cutter and Tray
With the Cutter and Tray, your 4400 printer cuts continuous media into
individual labels and drop them into a tray ready for use. This option works
best for individual random label lengths or short batches of different label
lengths.
Narrow Media Accessory Kit
The narrow media adapter accessory kit allows you to print roll stock that is
less than 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) wide. Using this narrow roll support accessory
prevents the media roll from telescoping. The combination of the narrow media
adapter and the narrow roll support accessory allows you to use media as
narrow as 0.5 inches.
A-11
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Memory Expansion
Expanded memory provides additional nonvolatile (battery backed) bulk
storage to hold more formats, fonts, or bitmap graphics.
Twinax Interface
This option lets you connect your printer to an IBM Twinax cable system with
a Twinax interface so your 4400 printer emulates an IBM 5256 Model 1 printer
and can operate with an IBM System/34, System/36, System/38 or AS/400
host computer.
Coax Interface
The Coax Interface Adapter lets the 4400 printer emulate an IBM 3287 printer
by connecting the printer to IBM 3270 Type A Coax cable computer systems
operating in the VTAM (CICS/IMS/TSO) or 8100 (DPPX) environments. With
the Coax adapter you can connect the printer to an IBM 3174 or IBM
3274/76/99 system controller/multiplexer.
Centronics Parallel Interface
This option lets you connect your printer to a PC through a Centronics parallel
interface.
Intermec does not provide a cable for use with the parallel interface. The
following information will allow you to make your own interface cable.
The following pin descriptions are for the printer’s parallel interface connector:
Signal
Pin
Return
Direction
Description
DATASTB
1
19
IN
Negative pulse. Latches DB0-7 on the rising edge. 8 bits in
parallel provide data input. High is logical 1 and LOW is
logical 0.
DB0
2
20
IN
DB1
3
21
IN
DB2
4
22
IN
DB3
5
23
IN
DB4
6
24
IN
DB5
7
25
IN
DB6
8
26
IN
DB7
9
27
IN
ACK
10
28
OUT
A-12
Negative pulse. Data has been received.
Appendix
Signal
Pin
Return
Direction
Description
BUSY
11
29
OUT
If HIGH, printer cannot receive data.
PE
12
30
OUT
If HIGH, out of ribbon or media.
SELECT
13
-
OUT
Pulled to +5V. Printer is on.
CHASSIS
GND
17
-
-
Printer’s chassis gnd isolated from logic gnd.
INIT
31
16
IN
Clears I/OINT0 latch.
FAULT
32
33
OUT
See printer display.
A
Note: The maximum cable length for a parallel interface is 10 feet. The parallel
interface only allows one way communication with the printer. You may download
from the host terminal, but you cannot upload from the printer.
International Character Sets
The following tables show which hex codes to download for international
characters not available in the U.S. character set. To use the tables, find the hex
code for the U.S. character that corresponds with the character in your
language.
4400 Character Table
If you are running your printer in 4400 mode (you are not using 86XX
emulation), use this table to find the right hex codes for the international
character sets.
A-13
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
23
24
40
5E
5C
5D
5E
60
7E
7C
7D
7E
U.S. ASCII
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
¦
}
~
U.K. ASCII
£
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
¦
}
−
Germany
#
$
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
`
ä
ö
ü
ß
France
£
$
à
°
ç
§
^
`
é
ù
è
Norway/Denmark
#
$
@
Æ
Ø
Å
^
`
æ
ø
å
_
¨
Sweden/Finland
#
Ì
É
Ä
Ö
Å
Ü
é
ä
ö
å
ü
Spain
£
$
§
¡
Ñ
¿
^
`
°
ñ
ç
~
Switzerland
#
$
à
°
ç
é
^
ù
ä
ö
ü
è
Italy
£
$
§
°
ç
é
^
ù
à
ò
è
ì
8636/46 Character Table
This table shows the hex codes for the character sets that print if your printer is
running under 86XX emulation mode.
23
24
40
5B
5C
5D
5E
60
7B
7C
7D
7E
U.S. ASCII
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
¦
}
~
U.K. ASCII
£
$
@
[
\
]
^
`
{
¦
}
~
Germany
#
$
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
`
ä
ö
ü
ß
France
£
$
à
°
ç
§
^
`
é
ù
è
¨
Norway/Denmark
#
$
@
Æ
Ø
Å
^
`
æ
ø
å
~
Sweden/Finland
#
¤
É
Ä
Ö
Å
Ü
é
ä
ö
å
ü
Spain
Pt
$
@
¡
Ñ
¿
^
`
¨
ñ
ç
~
Switzerland
#
$
à
°
ç
é
^
ù
ä
ö
ü
è
Italy
#
$
§
°
ç
é
^
ù
à
ò
è
ì
A-14
A
Appendix
Translation Character Table
If you are running your printer with Translation enabled, use this table to find
the right hex codes for the international character sets.
4F
7B
5B
7C
4A
E0
5A
5F
79
C0
6A
D0
A1
U.S. ASCII
¦
#
$
@
¢
\
!
¬
`
{
¦
}
~
U.K. ASCII
¦
#
£
@
$
\
!
¬
`
{
¦
}
_
Germany
!
#
$
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
`
ä
ö
ü
ß
France
!
£
$
à
°
ç
§
^
`
é
ù
è
¨
Norway/Denmark
!
Æ
Å
Ø
#
\
¤
^
`
æ
ø
å
ü
Sweden/Finland
!
Ä
Å
Ö
§
É
¤
^
é
ä
ö
å
ü
Spain
¦
Ñ
Pt
@
[
\
]
¬
`
{
ñ
}
¨
Switzerland
!
#
$
à
°
ç
é
^
ù
ä
ö
ü
è
Italy
!
£
$
§
°
ç
é
^
ù
à
ò
è
ì
A-15
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Extended Character Sets
Each internal font in the 4400 has a different character set associated with it as
shown in the following tables. The hex codes accompany each character.
Characters in Fonts c0: 7x9 Standard, c1: 7x11 OCR, c2: 10x14 Standard
ØØ
Ø1
Ø2
Ø3
Ø4
Ø5
Ø6
Ø7
Ø8
Ø9
ØA
ØB
ØC
ØD
ØE
ØF
1Ø
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
2Ø
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
3Ø
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
4Ø
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
5Ø
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
6Ø
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
7Ø
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
8Ø
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
9Ø
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
AØ
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
BØ
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
CØ
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
DØ
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
EØ
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
FØ
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
4400-86
A-16
A
Appendix
Characters in Font c7: 5x7 Standard
ØØ
Ø1
Ø2
Ø3
Ø4
Ø5
Ø6
Ø7
Ø8
Ø9
ØA
ØB
ØC
ØD
ØE
ØF
1Ø
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
2Ø
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
3Ø
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
4Ø
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
5Ø
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
6Ø
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
7Ø
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
8Ø
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
9Ø
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
AØ
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
BØ
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
CØ
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
DØ
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
EØ
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
FØ
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
4400-80
A-17
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Characters in Font c22: 20 Point
ØØ
Ø1
Ø2
Ø3
Ø4
Ø5
Ø6
Ø7
Ø8
Ø9
ØA
1Ø
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
ØB
ØC
ØD
ØE
ØE
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
+
!
" # $ % & ’
(
)
,
-
.
/
2Ø
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
3Ø
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
@
A
B
C D E
F
G H
4Ø
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
P
Q R S
T
U V
5Ø
51
52
53
54
55
56
`
a
b
c
d
e
6Ø
61
62
63
64
65
p
q
r
s
t
7Ø
71
72
73
74
8Ø
81
82
83
9Ø
91
92
AØ
A1
¡
A2
*
I
J
K
L
M N O
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
W X
Y
Z
[
\
]
ˆ
_
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m n
o
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
u
v
w x
y
z
{
}
∼
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
£
¤
¥
§
¨
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
°
B4
B5
B6
BØ
B1
B2
B3
CØ
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
ä
å æ
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
ñ
ò
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Ä
FØ
B8
C6
C7
C8
D6
E6
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
DA
DB
DD
DE
DF
ED
EE
EF
FD
FE
Ø
D7
D8
D8
ç
è
é
E7
E8
E9
ø
ù
F8
F9
ö
F6
BA
B9
É
Ö
à
EØ
B7
Å Æ
Ñ
DØ
AF
¿
F7
Ü
DC
ë
ì
EA
EB
EC
FA
FB
ß
ü
FC
FF
4400-81
A-18
Appendix
A
Characters in Font c23: OCR A
ØØ
Ø1
Ø2
Ø3
Ø4
Ø5
Ø6
Ø7
Ø8
Ø9
ØA
ØB
ØC
ØD
ØE
ØE
1Ø
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
2Ø
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
3Ø
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
4Ø
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
5Ø
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
6Ø
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
7Ø
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
8Ø
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
9Ø
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
AØ
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
BØ
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
CØ
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
DØ
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D8
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
EØ
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
FØ
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
4400-82
A-19
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Characters in Font c24: OCR B Size 2
ØØ
Ø1
Ø2
Ø3
Ø4
Ø5
Ø6
Ø7
Ø8
Ø9
ØA
ØB
ØC
ØD
ØE
ØE
1Ø
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
2Ø
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
3Ø
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
4Ø
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
5Ø
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
6Ø
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
7Ø
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
8Ø
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
9Ø
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
AØ
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
BØ
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
CØ
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
DØ
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D8
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
EØ
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
FØ
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
4400-83
A-20
A
Appendix
Characters in Fonts c25: Outline Font, c20: 8 Point, c21: 12 Point
ØØ
Ø1
Ø2
Ø3
Ø4
Ø5
Ø6
Ø7
Ø8
Ø9
ØA
1Ø
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
ØB
ØC
ØD
ØE
ØE
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
+
!
" # $ % & ’
(
)
,
-
.
/
2Ø
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
3Ø
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
@
A
B
C D E
F
G H
4Ø
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
P
Q R S
T
U V
5Ø
51
52
53
54
55
56
`
a
b
c
d
e
6Ø
61
62
63
64
p
q
r
s
7Ø
71
72
73
8Ø
81
82
9Ø
91
92
AØ
I
J
K
L
M N O
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
W X
Y
Z
[
\
]
ˆ
_
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m n
o
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
t
u
v
w x
y
z
{
}
∼
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
93
94
95
96
97
9A
9B
9C
9D
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
°
±
BØ
B1
2
B2
3
B3
À
Á
 Ã
CØ
C1
C2
D Ñ
*
´
B4
Ä
|
|
A6
µ
¶
B5
B6
¨
A7
A8
A9
.
B7
Ç
B8
1
B9
a
AA
0
BA
É Ê
C9
CA
9F
-
¬
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
»
1
4
1
2
3
4
¿
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
Ë
Ì
Í
Î
Ï
CC
CD
CE
CF
Ü Y´
I
ß
DC
DD
DE
DF
ë
ì
í
î
ï
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
ÿ
CB
C8
Ö
×
Ø Ù
D6
D7
D8
D8
DA
DB
ç
è
é
ê
EA
Ò Ó Ô Õ
-
9E
®
«
C7
C6
C4
99
©
Å Æ Ç È
C5
C3
98
§
Ú Û
DØ
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
à
á
â
ã
ä
å æ
EØ
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
o~
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
y´
Io
FØ
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
4400-84
A-21
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
ASCII Conversion Chart
FULL ASCII
Binary0
Hex1
Dec2
C393
Char4
Binary
Hex
Dec
C39
Char Control
Character Definitions5
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00
01
02
03
00
01
02
03
%U
$A
$B
$C
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
01000000
01000001
01000010
01000011
40
41
42
43
64
65
66
67
%V
A
B
C
@
A
B
C
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
Null, or all zeroes
Start of Heading
Start of Text
End of Text
00000100
00000101
00000110
00000111
00001000
00001001
00001010
00001011
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
$D
$E
$F
$G
$H
$I
$J
$K
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
01000100
01000101
01000110
01000111
01001000
01001001
01001010
01001011
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
End of Transmission
Enquiry
Acknowledgement
Bell
Backspace
Horizontal Tab
Line Feed
Vertical Tab
00001100
00001101
00001110
00001111
00010000
00010001
00010010
00010011
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
$L
$M
$N
$O
$P
$Q
$R
$S
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
01001100
01001101
01001110
01001111
01010000
01010001
01010010
01010011
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
Form Feed
Carriage Return
Shift Out
Shift In
Data Link Escape
Device Control 1 (XON)
Device Control 2
Device Control 3 (XOFF)
00010100
00010101
00010110
00010111
00011000
00011001
00011010
00011011
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
$T
$U
$V
$W
$X
$Y
$Z
%A
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
01010100
01010101
01010110
01010111
01011000
01011001
01011010
01011011
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
%K
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
Device Control
Negative Acknowledge
Syncronous Idle
End Transmission Block
Cancel
End of Medium
Substitute
Escape
00011100
00011101
00011110
00011111
00100000
00100001
00100010
00100011
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
%B
%C
%D
%E
SP
/A
/B
/C
FS
GS
RS
US
SP6
!
"
#
01011100
01011101
01011110
01011111
01100000
01100001
01100010
01100011
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
%L
%M
%N
%O
%W
+A
+B
+C
\
]
^
_
`
a
b
c
FS
GS
RS
US
SP
DEL
File Separator
Group Separator
Record Separator
Unit Separator
Space
Delete
00100100
00100101
00100110
00100111
00101000
00101001
00101010
00101011
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
/J
/K
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
01100100
01100101
01100110
01100111
01101000
01101001
01101010
01101011
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
+D
+E
+F
+G
+H
+I
+J
+K
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
00101100
00101101
00101110
00101111
00110000
00110001
00110010
00110011
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
/L
/M
/N
/O
/P7
/Q
/R
/S
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
01101100
01101101
01101110
01101111
01110000
01110001
01110010
01110011
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
+L
+M
+N
+O
+P
+Q
+R
+S
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
0
1
2
3
4
5
00110100
00110101
00110110
00110111
00111000
00111001
00111010
00111011
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
/T
/U
/V
/W
/X
/Y
/Z
%F
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
01110100
01110101
01110110
01110111
01111000
01111001
01111010
01111011
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
+T
+U
+V
+W
+X
+Y
+Z
%P
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
Bit positions are 76543210
Hexadecimal value
Decimal value
Code 39 character(s)
ASCII character
Hold down Control key
and press key to left
of definition
SP is the SPACE character
The Code 39 characters
/P through /Y may be
interchanged with the
numbers 0 through 9
May be interchanged with
%X or %Y or %Z
is the DELETE character
00111100
00111101
00111110
00111111
3C
3D
3E
3F
60
61
62
63
%G
%H
%I
%J
<
=
>
?
01111100
01111101
01111110
01111111
7C
7D
7E
7F
124
125
126
127
%Q
%R
%S
%T8
|
}
~
Notes
6
7
8
9
9
ASCI7x10
A-22
G
Glossary
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Glossary
G
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A standard, 7-bit
character code used for computing.
backing
Silicon release liner on media to which labels are attached until ready for use.
bar code
A printed machine-readable code that consists of parallel bars of varied width
and spacing.
batch takeup
A device that rewinds media; useful for printing batches of labels.
BEL
A character that sends an error message.
character set
Refers to specific letters, numerals, and symbols that support a particular
language, such as French or US ASCII.
cloning
A procedure that copies the RAM contents (configuration, formats, fonts, pages
and graphics) from the memory of one printer to the memory of another.
configuration
The current settings that determine the operating characteristics of the printer.
control panel
A panel on the printer containing the operating and menu keys, liquid crystal
display, and indicator lights.
cutter
An optional device for the 4400 printer that cuts individual labels and drops
them into a tray.
Data Line Print
A mode of operation in which the printer prints each command (accompanied
by its ASCII code) that it receives from the host.
G-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
data file
The collection of data and printer commands that, when sent to the printer, is
merged with a format file to print a label.
density
The amount of information encoded in a given area.
direct thermal
A method of thermal printing in which images are printed when heat from the
thermal printhead produces a black mark on the media.
display
Two-line screen on the control panel that displays messages such as printer
status, menus, commands, and errors.
drag
A method of bar code printing in which all the bars are printed at once, in
parallel. The bar code appears across the width of the label.
EAN
European Article Numbering. A bar code used widely in Europe.
emulation
An operating mode in which the printer has the operating characteristics of
another printer. The 4400 can operate in 8636/46 emulation, which emulates an
Intermec 8636 or 8646 printer.
field
A graphic element that is the basic unit of a format. The four basic types of
fields are bar code, graphic, line, and text.
fixed data field
Bar code and text fields that never vary from one label to the next; the data in a
fixed field is a permanent part of the format.
fixed format
A format in which the data never varies from one label to the next such as a
return address label. A fixed format needs no additional data to print a label.
font
A character set of a given type size and style. See also Character Set.
G-4
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Glossary
G
font file
See Soft Font.
form feed
A printer control panel button that advances the media.
format file
The arrangement of fields on a label.
graphic
A bitmap picture downloaded to the printer by the host before printing.
HIBC
Health Industry Bar Code.
human-readable
See Text.
image bands
A portion of an image, in the shape of a strip of the image. A certain number of
image bands are stored in memory before printing begins. This method allows
printing and imaging to take place simultaneously.
imaging
The process of generating a picture of the label in printer memory.
increment/decrement field
Bar code or text fields the printer automatically changes from one label to the
next. For example, a batch of labels with serial number text or bar code fields,
that change from 001, to 002, to 003, and so on.
index
To move from the start of the label to the start of print. With continuous media,
to advance the media over the “label gap” to the “edge” of the next label.
interpretive field
A text field that describes the data in the associated bar code field.
ISO
International Organization for Standardization. An internationally accepted 7bit character code. (The US version is ASCII.)
G-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
ips
Inches per second. A measurement of print speed that measures the number of
inches of media that is printed each second.
label
The part of the media on which data is printed.
label gap
The space between labels on diecut label stock.
LCD
Liquid crystal display. A display comprised of groups of transparent
anisotropic liquid segments that are sandwiched between two transparent
electrodes. Application of an electric field across a segment changes the
reflectivity of the liquid and it becomes opaque.
Main menu
The menu from which all printer commands are available. These commands
are divided into categories described by the title of the four menus within the
main menu: Operator, Configuration, Service, and Install.
margin
The distance between the edge of a label and where the printing starts on that
label. See also Top-of-Form.
media
The label stock on which the printer prints labels. Media can be made of plain
paper, polyester, thermally reactive paper, or other materials with adhesive
backing.
menu
A list of commands accessible through the Control Panel on the printer. Menus
contain submenus and selections of printer features.
mnemonic code
An acronym or abbreviation for a computer instruction, routine or format. For
example, <STX> represents the start of text.
Multi-Drop
A protocol capable of controlling communications between a single controller
and multiple devices.
G-6
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Glossary
G
nibblized
A software term that refers to grouping bits into sets of four, called nibbles.
Usually bits are grouped into sets of eight, called bytes.
OCR font
A font that is recognized by optical character recognition.
offline
The state in which the printer is not able to carry out two-way communication
with the host.
online
The state in which the printer is able to carry out two-way communication with
the host.
page
A group of labels that are always printed together. When labels on a page
share the same data, it reduces the number of commands that must be sent to
the printer.
parallel
A communication scheme in which the bits of a byte are transferred
simultaneously over a multistrand cable.
parameters
The operating limits of the printer.
picket
A method of bar code printing in which the bars in the bar code are printed one
at a time, in a series. The bar code appears along the length of the label.
pitch
(1) The number of characters printed in one horizontal inch determined by the
increment by which the printer platen moves. (2) Rotation of a bar code symbol
about an axis parallel to the direction of the bars.
point size
Font height; 72 points equals 1 inch as measured from slightly above the top of
the uppercase letters to slightly below the bottom of the lowercase descenders.
Polling Mode D
A protocol capable of controlling communications between multiple devices
and a single multiport controller.
G-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
print speed
Measured in inches per second (ips), the rate at which media travels past the
printhead.
printhead
The mechanism inside the printer that prints. The printhead consists of 896
thermal elements (the 4406 contains 672 elements).
printhead elements
The parts of the printhead that print by placing a mark on the label when
heated. Each element is 0.00485 square inches in area (the printhead for the
4406 is 0.006575 square inches), and is switched on and off separately in order
to react with the media or thermal transfer ribbon to create a mark on the label.
printhead range
The range over which the resistance of the wires that carry energy to the
printhead elements can vary before sending a warning. The wires are tested
with each Printhead Test.
printhead test
A test that takes place each time the printer is turned on, or receives a specific
command from the host. This test makes sure the resistance of the wires that
carry energy to the printhead elements are within the acceptable range, which
ensures the temperature of the elements is within the acceptable temperature
range.
ready
The state in which the printer is able to print; the normal operating state of the
printer.
Ready/Busy line
Pin 11 of the rear panel connector. Indicates the printer is ready or not ready.
ribbon save
An optional device for some Intermec printers that disengages the thermal
transfer ribbon while labels are being fed forward, or any other time printing
does not take place. The 4400 printer does not offer this option.
RS-232
Standard for serial binary data interchange. The standard covers the physical,
electrical, and functional characteristics of the interface.
G-8
HelvC NugFont
Co d e 39
Glossary
G
RS-422
Standard for the voltage and impedance levels for serial data transmission on
balanced lines.
RS-485
Standard for allowing multiple devices to share a common set of serial data
communication lines. The signaling is very similar to RS-422. The maximum
number of devices allowed is 32.
scan
To read a bar code with a device known as a scanner, which converts optical
information into electrical signals.
scannable
A symbol that can be successfully scanned and correctly decoded.
selective transfer
A procedure that copies selected formats, fonts, graphics, or pages stored in the
memory of one printer to the memory of another.
self-strip
An optional device for the 4400 printer that presents each label after it is
printed, with the backing removed so it may be applied immediately.
sensitivity
The responsiveness of thermal media, or of thermal transfer ribbon, to heat; it
is determined by the time required for a unit measure of heat to affect the
media or ribbon.
serial
A communication scheme in which the bits of a byte are transferred one at a
time.
skip
To move the paper at slew speed to the next label.
soft font
A file stored in the printer to provide the ability to print text using fonts that
are not resident in the printer.
Standard protocol
A communications protocol capable of controlling communications between
two devices connected by a single data communication line.
G-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
symbology
A scheme for encoding data as bar code. Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, and
Codabar are examples of different symbologies.
thermal transfer
A method of printing by which heat from the printhead melts ink from the
ribbon onto media. The ink adheres to the media as it cools.
top of form
The point at which printing can start on a label. Separated from the edge of the
label by the margin.
UPC
Universal Product Code. Bar code used widely in the United States.
user-defined characters (UDC)
See Graphic.
user-defined fonts (UDF)
See Soft Font.
variable data field
Bar code and text fields that change from one label to the next.
XON/XOFF
A protocol that stops the host from sending data when the printer buffer fills
up and starts it again when the buffer empties.
G-10
I
Index
Index
Symbols
<ACK>, 7-4
<BEL>, 7-4, 7-8
error codes, 9-13
<BS>, 7-4
<CAN>, 7-4
<CR>, 7-4, 7-10
<DEL>, 7-4
<DLE>, 7-4, 7-8, 7-33
<EM>, 7-4
<ENQ>, 7-4, 7-8
<EOT>, 7-6
<ETB>, 7-5
<ETX>, 6-7, 7-20, 7-33
<FF>, 7-5
<FS>, 7-5
<GS>, 7-5
<LF>, 7-5, 7-10
<NUL>, 7-5
<RS>, 7-5
<SO>, 7-5
<STX>, 6-7, 7-20, 7-33
<SUB>, 7-5
<US>, 7-5
<VT>, 7-5
[↑], 3-6
[↓], 3-6
[CONTINUE], 3-6
[ENTER], 3-6
[FEED/RELOAD], 3-5, 3-6
[MENU], 3-6
[ONLINE/OFFLINE], 3-5
[OPEN], 3-5, 3-6
[SELECT], 3-6
Numbers
12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit, 7-11
24 Volt Supply Value, Transmit, 7-11
2D symbologies, A-9
printing, 7-76
4400 mode, international character sets, A-13
4400 Mode, Select, 7-4, 7-20
86XX emulation, 5-4, 5-21, 5-22
compared to 4400 printing, 5-22
settings, 5-21
international character sets, A-14
86XX Emulation Mode, Enter, 7-21
86XX Emulation Mode, Select, 7-4
86XX or 4400 Mode on Power Up, 7-6, 7-33, 7-65
86XX printer, replacing with a 4400 printer, 5-21
I
A
Abort Print Job, 7-4, 7-21, 7-63
access the Main menu, 3-7
accessing printer menus, using selection keys, 3-6
address, device, 2-12
adjusting the edge guides, 4-11
adjusting the label rest point, 4-23
Alert light, 3-4
Alphanumeric Field Separator, 7-5, 7-21, 7-63
Ambient Temperature, Transmit, 7-11
AS/400, connecting to the 4400, 2-9
ASCII control characters
creating using a word processor, 6-6
using for terminal emulation, 6-8
ASCII conversion chart, A-22
audible alarm, 5-4
Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable, 7-6, 7-34
Automatic Printhead Resistance test commands, 7-19
Auto-Transmit 1, 7-6
Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, 7-6
Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable, 7-5, 7-35
Auto-Transmit 1, Enable, 7-5, 7-34
Auto-Transmit 2, 7-6
Auto-Transmit 2, Enable, 7-4, 7-34
Auto-Transmit 3, 7-6
Auto-Transmit 3, Enable, 7-5, 7-35
auto-transmit commands, 7-66
B
Bar Code Field, Create or Edit, 7-8, 7-46
bar code fields, 6-10
editing commands, 7-13
magnifying, 6-20
Bar Code, Select Type, 7-45
bar codes
2D matrix symbologies, A-10
2D stacked symbologies, A-9
Codabar, A-6
Code 11, A-7
Code 128, A-7
Code 16K, A-9
Code 2 of 5, A-6
Code 39, A-6
Code 49, A-9
Code 93, A-6
Code One, A-10
EAN, A-7
Interleaved 2 of 5, A-6
Maxicode, A-11
PDF 417, A-10
POSTNET, A-8
selecting commands, 7-70
symbologies, A-6
UPC, A-7
I-3
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Batch Count, Set, 7-5, 7-22
batch printing, optimizing image bands, 5-12
baud rate, 2-12
Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define, 7-10,
7-46
Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define, 7-10,
7-47
bitmap fonts, 6-10
downloading, 6-13
bitmap UDFs, editing commands, 7-15
Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define, 7-8
Bitstream Typeface Packages for the PC, 6-11
Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define, 7-9
Box Field, Create or Edit, 7-9, 7-47
box fields, 6-13
editing commands, 7-14
Box or Line Field, Define Length, 7-48
buffer, printing contents, 4-24
Buffer Already Full, 7-66
Buffer Now Full, 7-66
C
cabling considerations, in noisy environments, 2-11
calibrating label sensors, 9-16
cautions, xviii
centering your label, 4-21
Centronics parallel interface, 7-3, A-12
changing the default values, 5-5
changing thermal transfer ribbon, 4-12
character fields, 6-10
Character Origin Offset, Define, 7-9, 7-48
Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define, 7-9, 7-48
character sets, 5-4, A-5
international, A-13
character table
4400 mode, A-13
86XX emulation, A-14
IBM language translation, A-15
circle of menus, how to use, 3-8
cleaning
edge guides, 10-10
label sensors, 10-9
paper path, 10-9
platen roller and tear bar, 10-7
printer case, 10-6
printhead, 10-6
schedule, 10-4
Clear, 7-66
Clear All Data, 7-4, 7-22, 7-63
Clear Data From Current Field, 7-4, 7-22, 7-63
clearing memory, 6-23
cloning, 8-4
connecting printers, 8-5
downloading sender RAM, 8-7
I-4
preparing sender printer, 8-6
preparing the receiver printer, 8-5
closing the printer, 1-14, 4-5
media alert enabled, 4-6
Coax interface, A-12
Codabar, 7-70, A-6
Code 11, 7-71, A-7
Code 128, 7-71, A-7
Code 16K, 7-72, A-9
Code 2 of 5, 7-70, A-6
Code 39, 7-70, A-6
Code 39 Prefix Character, Define, 7-9, 7-49
Code 49, 7-72, A-9
Code 93, 7-70, A-6
Code One, 7-74, 7-77, A-10
version, 7-78
command tables, 7-63
Command Terminator, 7-10, 7-11, 7-45
Command Terminator 1, 7-5, 7-22, 7-63
Command Terminator 2, 7-5, 7-22, 7-63
commands
grouped according to function, 7-12
printer functional limits, 7-80
printing a hard copy, 9-15
semicolon and parentheses, 7-45
summary, 7-3
communicating with the printer, 6-4
using PrintSet software, 6-5
using the printer command set, 6-5
communication problems, troubleshooting, 9-6
communication protocol characters, 7-68
communications, A-5
verifying, 2-14
communications port, 1-6
components, maintaining, 10-3
configuration
changing the basic settings, 5-3
default values, 5-20
label settings, 5-6
configuration commands, 7-17
86XX or 4400 Mode on Power Up, 7-33
Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable, 7-34
Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable, 7-35
Auto-Transmit 1, Enable, 7-34
Auto-Transmit 2, Enable, 7-34
Auto-Transmit 3, Enable, 7-35
Control Panel Access Permission, Set, 7-35
Cutter, Enable or Disable, 7-35
Dark Adjust, Set, 7-36
default values, 7-6
description, 6-9, 7-33
End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set, 7-36
IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable, 7-37
Intercharacter Delay, Set, 7-37
Label Rest Point, Adjust, 7-37
Index
Label Retract Distance, Set, 7-38
Label Retract, Enable or Disable, 7-38
Label Stock Type, Select, 7-38
Label Width, Set, 7-39
Maximum Label Length, Set, 7-39
Message Delay, Set, 7-39
Modified Field Reimaging, 7-40
Number of Image Bands, Set, 7-41
Online or Offline on Power Up, 7-41
Preamble, Set, 7-41
Print Speed, Set, 7-42
Printer Language, Select, 7-42
Printhead Pressure, Set, 7-43
Printhead Test Parameters, Set, 7-43
Self-Strip, Enable or Disable, 7-44
summary, 7-6
Top of Form, Set, 7-44
TTR or Direct Thermal, Select, 7-44
Configuration menu, 3-7
Configuration Parameters, Transmit, 7-5, 7-23
configuration test label, printing, 1-10, 1-14
configuration test labels, 5-16
hardware, 5-16
printing, 5-17
user-defined, 5-16
configuring the label width, 5-12
configuring the printer, 5-3
configuring the serial port, 2-12
connecting
printer to a mainframe, 2-9
printer to a network, 2-9
printer to an AS/400, 2-9
printer to a PC, 2-6
using the parallel port, 2-8
using the serial port, 2-6
connecting the printer to your system, 2-5
Continue key, 3-6
control panel, 1-6, 3-3
circle of menus, 3-8
lindicator ights, 3-4
operator keys, 3-5
tips for using, 3-10
using menus, 3-7
when to use, 3-3
Control Panel Access Permission, Set, 7-6, 7-35
control panel display
error messages, 3-4
menu messages, 3-4
operating messages, 3-4
reading, 3-4
conventions used in this manual, xix
cooling fan, 1-6
copyright information, ii
Cut, 7-5, 7-23, 7-63
cutter, 5-4
I
cutter and tray, A-11
cutter commands, 7-19
Cutter, Enable or Disable, 7-6, 7-35
D
dark adjust, 9-19
setting, 4-20
Dark Adjust, Set, 7-6, 7-36
data bits, 2-12
Data Line Print command, 2-14, 9-15
Data Shift, 7-63
Data Shift - International Characters, 7-5, 7-23
Data Source for Format in a Page, Define, 7-9
default configuration, restoring, 5-19
default configuration settings, 5-4
default values, 5-20
changing, 5-5, 5-7
configuration commands, 7-6
Print mode commands, 7-4
Program mode commands, 7-8
restoring, 1-15
Delete Field, 7-8, 7-49
deleting fields, 6-19
designing labels, 6-3
designing pages, 6-22
device address, 2-12
dimensions, A-3
direct thermal media, setting the media sensitivity
number, 4-18
Disable Auto-Transmit 1, 2 and 3, 7-64
Disable Increment/Decrement, 7-64
DOS, using to download commands, 6-5
DOS Copy command, 6-6
downloading
auto-transmit commands, 7-66
escape print commands, 7-64
Print mode commands, 7-63
protocol commands, 7-67
shift print commands, 7-65
status responses, 7-66
downloading bitmap fonts, 6-13
downloading bitmaps, 6-15
downloading commands
using DOS, 6-5
using host terminals, 6-7
using PC communications programs, 6-7
using readable protocol/command characters, 6-6
downloading formats, 6-4
using PC communications programs, 6-7
downloading graphics
one bit per byte, 6-15
six bits per byte, 6-16
downloading sender RAM, 8-7
downloading user-defined fonts, 6-13
I-5
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
E
EAN, A-7
edge guides, 1-6
adjusting, 4-11
cleaning, 10-10
opening, 4-7
Edit Session, Save Current, 7-49
editing fields, 6-18
editing labels, 6-18
electrical requirements, A-3
emulating an 86XX Printer, See 86XX emulation.
Enable Auto-Transmit 1, 7-64
Enable Auto-Transmit 2, 7-64
Enable Auto-Transmit 3, 7-64
Enable or Disable Audible Alarm, 7-65
Enable or Disable Cutter, 7-65
Enable or Disable Label Retract, 7-65
Enable or Disable Self-Strip, 7-65
Enable or Disable Translation, 7-65
End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set, 7-6, 7-36
Enter key, 3-6
Enter Program Mode, 7-64
Enter Start/Stop Character, 7-64
Enter Test and Service Mode, 7-64
environment, A-4
Erase Format, 7-8, 7-49
Error Code, Transmit, 7-4, 7-23
error codes, 9-13
error messages
troubleshooting, 9-6
understanding, 4-24
escape print commands, 7-64
examples, 6-3, 6-13, 6-15, 6-23, 6-24, 6-27
Exit Test and Service, 7-79
extended character sets, A-16
F
Feed/Reload operator key, 3-5, 3-6
feeding media into the printer, 4-9
Field Data, Define Source, 7-50
Field Decrement, Set, 7-4, 7-24
Field Direction, Define, 7-9, 7-50
Field Increment, Set, 7-4, 7-24
Field Origin, Define, 7-9, 7-51
Field, Select, 7-4, 7-24
fields
bar code, 6-10
box, 6-13
character, 6-10
definition, 6-9
deleting, 6-19
I-6
editing, 6-18
fonts, 6-10
graphics, 6-14
line, 6-13
magnifying, 6-19
positioning, 6-20
positioning outline fonts, 6-21
reimaging modified fields, 7-40
rotating, 6-21
scaling, 6-19
First Data Entry Field, Select, 7-4, 7-25
Font Character Width, Define, 7-9, 7-51
font fields, 6-10
Font, Select Type, 7-51
Font, Transmit, 7-5, 7-25
fonts, A-5
bitmap, 6-10
Bitstream Typeface Packages for the PC, 6-11
extended character sets, A-16
internal, 6-10
magnifying, 6-19
outline, 6-10
selecting commands, 7-69
sending to receiver printer, 8-10
standard, A-16
tables, A-16
user-defined, 6-12
using print tests, 9-14
Form Feed, 7-5, 7-25, 7-63
Format Data in a Page, Define Source, 7-52
Format Direction in a Page, Define, 7-9, 7-53
Format Offset With a Page, Define, 7-53
Format Offset Within a Page, Define, 7-8
Format Position from Page, Delete, 7-9, 7-54
Format Position in a Page, Assign, 7-8, 7-53
Format, Create or Edit, 7-8, 7-52
Format, Select, 7-4, 7-26
Format, Transmit, 7-5, 7-26
formats
designing, 6-3
downloading to printer, 6-4
downloading using PC communications programs,
6-7
editing commands, 7-12
examples, 6-3, 6-23, 6-24, 6-27
improving print quality, 9-19
sending to receiver printer, 8-10
storing, 6-22, 6-23
uploading to printer, 6-4
using print tests, 9-14
forms adjust command, using, 4-21
functional limits, 7-80
fuse, 1-8
replacing, 10-11
Index
G
Gap Sensor Value, Transmit, 7-11
Go To Escape Command Table, 7-63
Go To Shift Command Table, 7-63
Graphic or UDC, Define, 7-9, 7-54
Graphic, Select Type, 7-54
graphics, A-5
designing, 6-14
downloading, 6-15, 6-16
one bit per byte, 6-14
sending to receiver printer, 8-10
six bits per byte, 6-16
using print tests, 9-14
H
hardware configuration test label, 5-16
height, changing magnification, 6-19
Height Magnification, Define, 7-9, 7-54
HIBC Code 128, 7-76
HIBC Code 39, 7-72
host computer, connecting, 2-5
host terminals, using to download commands, 6-7
human-readable field zero (H0), 6-3
Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit, 7-8, 7-55
human-readable fields, editing commands, 7-13
Human-Readable Text, Define Border Around, 7-55
I
I/O port, 1-8
IBM language translation, 5-4
character table, A-15
IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable, 7-7, 7-37
image bands
adjusting with print speed, 5-11, 9-19
changing, 5-6
optimizing for batch printing, 5-12
Imager Overrun, 7-66
imaging, reimaging modified fields, 7-40
inches, 5-4
increasing available memory, 9-17
Increment and Decrement, Disable, 7-4, 7-26
indicator lights
Alert, 3-4
Online, 3-5
Power, 3-4
inspecting the printer, 10-3
Install menu, 3-7
installing
configuring the serial port, 2-12
media roll holder, 2-4
printer, 2-3
software drivers, 8-13
installing a media roll, 4-8
I
installing options, 8-13
Insufficient RAM, 7-66
Intercharacter Delay, Set, 7-7, 7-37
Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define, 7-10, 7-56
Interleaved 2 of 5, 7-70, A-6
internal fonts, 6-10
extended character sets, A-16
international character sets, A-13
Interpretive Field, Edit, 7-8, 7-56
Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable, 7-9, 7-56
interpretive fields, editing commands, 7-13
L
label, calibrating sensors, 9-16
Label and Gap Length, Transmit, 7-4, 7-27
Label at Strip Pin, Cutter Busy/Jammed, 7-66
label gap sensor, 1-6
label mark sensor, 1-6
Label Path Open, 7-66
Label Path Open Value, Transmit, 7-11
label rest point, adjusting, 4-23
Label Rest Point, Adjust, 7-6, 7-37
label retract, 5-4
Label Retract Distance, Set, 7-7, 7-38
Label Retract, Enable or Disable, 7-6, 7-38
label sensors
calibrating, 9-16
cleaning, 10-9
Label Stock Type, Select, 7-6, 7-38
Label Taken Value, Transmit, 7-11
label width, configuring, 5-12
Label Width, Set, 7-6, 7-39
labels, See also fields, formats, media.
changing configuration, 5-6
designing formats, 6-3
designing pages, 6-22
editing, 6-18
examples, 6-3, 6-13, 6-15
loading, 1-12
maximum length, 5-6
setting width, 5-6
stock type, 5-6
storing formats, 6-22
understanding design components, 6-9
languages, international character sets, A-13
learning about the printer, 1-5
Length of Line or Box Field, Define, 7-9
lights, 3-4
Line Field, Create or Edit, 7-8, 7-57
line fields, 6-13
editing commands, 7-14
Line or Box Field, Define Length, 7-57
Load Command Tables, 7-8, 7-57
loading media, 1-12, 4-7
loading options, 8-14
I-7
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
loading thermal transfer ribbon, 4-13
low media warn, setting, 5-14
M
magnifying bar code fields, 6-20
magnifying character fields, 6-19
magnifying fonts, 6-19
Main menu, accessing, 3-7
main port, See serial port.
mainframe, connecting to the 4400, 2-9
maintaining the printer, 10-3
manual
conventions, xix
summary, xviii
terms, xix
manual change record, iii
manual release, 1-6
Mark Sensor Value, Transmit, 7-11
Maxicode, 7-76, 7-78, A-11
carat-delimited fields, 7-78
country code, 7-78
fixed-length fields, 7-78
message, 7-78
service class, 7-78
zip code, 7-78
zip code extension, 7-78
Maximum Label Length, Set, 7-6, 7-39
maximum print quality, 9-18
maximum print speed, setting, 8-12
media
loading, 1-12, 4-7
positioning over tear bar or cutter, 4-23
selecting, 9-18
selecting direct thermal or thermal transfer, 5-6
media alert
closing the printer, 4-6
opening the printer, 4-6
setting, 5-14
media length, setting, 5-15
media length, setting, 5-14
media roll
installing, 4-8
removing, 4-8
media roll holder, 1-6
installing, 2-4
Media Selection Guide, 5-6
media sensitivity number, 9-18
direct thermal media, 4-18
setting, 4-16
thermal transfer media, 4-19
thermal transfer rating, 4-17
media shaft, removing, 4-8
media specifications, A-4
I-8
media supplies
Canadian phone number, ii
US phone number, ii
memory
expansion, A-12
increasing, 6-23
increasing available, 9-17
memory reset, 5-19
increasing available memory, 9-17
memory usage, 6-23
Menu key, 3-6
menus
accessing if restricted, 8-4
basic configuration settings, 5-3
circle of menus, 3-8
Configuration, 3-7
Install, 3-7
label configuration, 5-6
Main, 3-7
Operator, 3-7
restricting, 8-3
Service, 3-7
using, 3-7
Message Delay, Set, 7-6, 7-39
message length, 2-12
messages on the control panel display, 3-4
millimeters, 5-4
Modified Field Reimaging, 7-40
N
narrow media accessory kit, A-11
network, connecting to the 4400, 2-9
Next Data Entry Field, Select, 7-4, 7-27
No Label Stock, 7-66
Null Command, 7-10
Number of Image Bands, Set, 7-6, 7-41
Numeric Field Separator, 7-5, 7-27, 7-63
O
offline
mode on power-on, 5-4
switching from online, 3-5
one bit per byte graphics, 6-14
online
mode on power-on, 5-4
switching from offline, 3-5
Online light, 3-5
Online or Offline on Power Up, 7-6, 7-41, 7-65
Online/Offline operator keys, 3-5
Open operator key, 3-5, 3-6
opening the edge guides, 4-7
opening the printer, 1-11, 4-3, 4-4, 10-5
media alert enabled, 4-6
operating the printer, 4-3
Index
operator keys
[FEED/RELOAD], 3-5, 3-6
[ONLINE/OFFLINE], 3-5
[OPEN], 3-5, 3-6
using, 3-5
Operator menu, 3-7
optimizing image bands, 5-11
optimizing print speed, 5-11
options, A-11
Centronics parallel interface, A-12
Coax interface, A-12
cutter and tray, A-11
installing, 8-13
loading, 8-14
memory expansion, A-12
narrow media accessory kit, A-11
self-strip, A-11
software drivers, 8-14
Twinax interface, A-12
Options Selected, Transmit, 7-4, 7-27
Outline Font Description, Download, 7-9, 7-58
outline fonts, 6-10
positioning, 6-21
outline UDFs, editing commands, 7-15
Outline User-Defined Font, Clear or Create, 7-8, 7-58
P
Page, Create or Edit, 7-8, 7-58
Page, Delete, 7-9, 7-59
Page, Select, 7-4, 7-28
Page, Transmit, 7-5, 7-28
pages
designing, 6-22
editing commands, 7-12
sending to receiver printer, 8-10
using print tests, 9-14
paper path, cleaning, 10-9
parallel interface, 7-5
parallel port, using to connect the 4400 to a PC, 2-8
parameter errors, 9-10
parameters, functional limits, 7-80
parity, 2-12
PC communications programs, downloading
commands, 6-7
PDF 417, 7-73, 7-77, A-10
error correction levels, 7-77
number of columns, 7-77
truncate flag, 7-77
phone number
Canadian media supplies, ii
Canadian technical and service support, ii
US media supplies, ii
US technical and service support, ii
Pitch Label, Print, 7-11
Pitch Size, Set, 7-9, 7-59
I
platen roller, 1-6
cleaning, 10-7
Point Size, Set, 7-9, 7-59
positioning fields, 6-20
Postamble, Set, 7-6, 7-41
POSTNET, 7-72, A-8
Power light, 3-4
power receptacle, 1-8
power switch, 1-8, 1-10
power usage, A-3
powering up the printer, 1-10
Power-On mode, 5-4
Preamble, Set, 7-7, 7-41
preparing the receiver printer, 8-5, 8-9
preparing the sender printer, 8-6, 8-9
pressure, See printhead pressure.
Print, 7-5, 7-28, 7-63
Print Job Complete and Buffer Empty, 7-66
Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set, 7-9, 7-59
Print mode
switching from Program mode, 6-8
when to use, 6-8
Print mode commands, 7-63
4400 Mode, Select, 7-20
86XX Emulation Mode, Enter, 7-21
Abort Print Job, 7-21
Alphanumeric Field Separator, 7-21
Batch Count, Set, 7-22
Clear All Data, 7-22
Clear Data From Current Field, 7-22
Command Terminator 1, 7-22
Command Terminator 2, 7-22
Configuration Parameters, Transmit, 7-23
Cut, 7-23
Data Shift - International Characters, 7-23
default values, 7-4
descriptions, 7-20
Error Code, Transmit, 7-23
Field Decrement, Set, 7-24
Field Increment, Set, 7-24
Field, Select, 7-24
First Data Entry Field, Select, 7-25
Font, Transmit, 7-25
Form Feed, 7-25
Format, Select, 7-26
Format, Transmit, 7-26
Increment and Decrement, Disable, 7-26
Label and Gap Length, Transmit, 7-27
Next Data Entry Field, Select, 7-27
Numeric Field Separator, 7-27
Options Selected, Transmit, 7-27
Page, Select, 7-28
Page, Transmit, 7-28
Print, 7-28
Printhead Parameters, Transmit, 7-28
I-9
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
Print mode commands (continued)
Program Mode, Enter, 7-29
Program Number, Transmit, 7-29
Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit, 7-29
Quantity Count, Set, 7-29
Reset, 7-29
Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print, 7-30
Static RAM Usage, Transmit, 7-30
Status Dump, 7-30
Status Enquiry, 7-31
summary, 7-4
Test and Service Mode, Enter, 7-31
User-Defined Characters, Transmit, 7-31
User-Defined Tables, Transmit, 7-32
Warm Boot, 7-32
Print Pitch Label, 7-79
print quality, 9-18
adjusting image bands with print speed, 9-19
changing formats, 9-19
changing printhead pressure, 9-19
fine-tuning the dark adjust, 9-19
printhead aging, 9-21
selecting media, 9-18
setting the media sensitivity number, 9-18
troubleshooting, 9-5
using the printhead adjustment lever, 9-20
Print Quality Label, 7-79
Print Quality Label, Print, 7-11
print speed, A-3
adjusting with image bands, 5-11, 9-19
changing, 5-6
setting maximum, 8-12
Print Speed, Set, 7-6, 7-42
print tests, 9-14
printer
86XX emulation, 5-21
basic configuration settings, 5-3
choosing a location, 2-4
cleaning, 10-4
closing, 1-14, 4-5
communication problems, 9-6
configuring, 5-3
connectin g to a PC, 2-6
connecting for cloning, 8-5
connecting to a mainframe, 2-9
connecting to a network, 2-9
connecting to an AS/400, 2-9
connecting to your system, 2-5
emptying buffer, 4-24
error messages, 9-6
feeding media, 4-9
front view, 1-7
inspecting, 10-3
installing, 2-3
label configuration, 5-6
I-10
maintaining, 10-3
opening, 1-11, 10-5
opening with power off, 4-4
opening with power on, 4-3
operating, 4-3
operating environment, A-4
operating problems, 9-4
options, A-11
overview, 1-5
parts description, 1-6
power switch, 1-10
print quality problems, 9-5
rear view, 1-9
restoring default configuration, 5-19
specifications, A-3
troubleshooting, 9-3
turning on, 1-10
unpacking, 1-3
printer case, cleaning, 10-6
printer command set, using, 6-5
printer cover, 1-6
Printer Language, Select, 7-7, 7-42
printer memory, using, 6-23
printhead, 1-6
changing pressure, 5-6
cleaning, 10-6
printhead adjustment lever, 9-20
printhead aging, 9-21
Printhead Parameters, Transmit, 7-4, 7-28
printhead pressure, 5-8, 9-19
Printhead Pressure, Enable, 7-6
Printhead Pressure, Set, 7-43
printhead range, 5-4
printhead range percentage, See printhead test.
Printhead Resistance Test, 7-79
Printhead Resistance Test, Begin, 7-11
Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit, 7-11
printhead specifications, A-4
Printhead Temperature, Transmit, 7-11
printhead test, 5-4
adjusting, 5-9
adjusting range, 5-10
printhead range percentage, 5-9
using, 5-8
Printhead Test Fail, 7-66
Printhead Test Parameters, Set, 7-6, 7-43
Printing, 7-66
printing a configuration test label, 5-17
printing commands, 7-16
printing method, A-3
printing the configuration test label, 1-14
PrintSet software
using, 6-5
using to download bitmap fonts, 6-13
using to download user-defined fonts, 6-13
Index
Program mode
default values, 7-8
switching from Print mode, 6-8
when to use, 6-8
Program mode commands
Bar Code Field, Create or Edit, 7-46
Bar Code, Select Type, 7-45
Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define, 7-46
Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define, 7-47
Box Field, Create or Edit, 7-47
Box or Line Field, Define Length, 7-48
Character Origin Offset, Define, 7-48
Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define, 7-48
Code 39 Prefix Character, Define, 7-49
Delete Field, 7-49
descriptions, 7-45
Edit Session, Save Current, 7-49
Erase Format, 7-49
Exit, 7-60
Field Data, Define Source, 7-50
Field Direction, Define, 7-50
Field Origin, Define, 7-51
Font Character Width, Define, 7-51
Format Data in a Page, Define Source, 7-52
Format Direction in a Page, Define, 7-53
Format Offset With a Page, Define, 7-53
Format Position From Page, Delete, 7-54
Format Position in a Page, Assign, 7-53
Format, Create or Edit, 7-52
Graphic or UDC, Define, 7-54
Graphic, Select Type, 7-54
Height Magnification, Define, 7-54
Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit, 7-55
Human-Readable Text, Define Border Around, 7-55
Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define, 7-56
Interpretive Field, Edit, 7-56
Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable, 7-56
Line Field, Create or Edit, 7-57
Line or Box Field, Define Length, 7-57
Load Command Tables, 7-57
Outline Font Description, Download, 7-58
Outline User-Defined Font, Clear or Create, 7-58
Page, Create or Edit, 7-58
Page, Delete, 7-59
Pitch Size, Set, 7-59
Point Size, Set, 7-59
Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set, 7-59
Reset, 7-60
summary, 7-8
Transmit Error Code, 7-60
User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit, 7-61
User-Defined Character, Clear or Create, 7-60
User-Defined Font Character, Create, 7-62
User-Defined Font, Clear or Define Bitmap, 7-61
Width of Line, Box, Bar or Character, Define, 7-62
I
Program Mode, Enter, 7-4, 7-29
Program Mode, Exit, 7-8, 7-60
Program Number, Transmit, 7-4, 7-29
programming commands, 7-12
protocol, 2-12
protocol characters, communication, 7-68
protocol commands, 7-67
protocol modification commands, 7-18
Q
Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit, 7-4, 7-29
Quantity Count, Set, 7-5, 7-29
R
RAM
available printer memory, 6-23
installing an expansion board, 6-23
range errors, 9-11
readable protocol/command characters, using to
download commands, 6-6
reading the control panel display, 3-4
Ready, 7-66
removing the media roll, 4-8
removing the media shaft, 4-8
removing the ribbon access door, 4-12, 10-5
replacing the fuse, 10-11
replacing the ribbon access door, 4-15
Reset, 7-4, 7-8, 7-29, 7-60, 7-63
Reset Printer Configuration, 7-11, 7-79
resetting the memory, 5-19
restoring default configuration, 5-19
restoring printer default configuration, 1-15
ribbon
changing, 4-12
loading, 4-13
ribbon access door, 1-6
removing, 4-12, 10-5
replacing, 4-15
Ribbon Fault, 7-66
ribbon specifications, A-4
Room in Buffer, 7-66
rotating fields, 6-21
RS-232 null modem cable for AT, 2-7
RS-232 null modem cable for PC, 2-8
RS-422 pin assignments, 2-10
RS-485 cable, 2-11
S
safety summary, xvii
Save Current Edit Session, 7-8
scaling fields, 6-19
security levels
bypassing, 8-4
descriptions, 8-3
I-11
4400 Bar Code Label Printer User’s Manual
security levels (continued)
setting, 8-3
Select 4400 Mode, 7-64
Select 86XX Emulation Mode, 7-64
Select Field, 7-64
Select First Data Entry Field, 7-63
Select Format, 7-64
Select key, 3-6
Select Label Stock Type, 7-65
Select Next Data Entry Field, 7-63
Select Page, 7-64
Select Printer Language, 7-65
Select TTR or Direct Thermal, 7-65
selecting media, 9-18
selection keys
[CONTINUE], 3-6
[ENTER], 3-6
[MENU], 3-6
[SELECT], 3-6
using to access menus, 3-6
selective transfer, 8-8
connecting printers, 8-8
preparing the receiver printer, 8-9
preparing the sender printer, 8-9
self-strip, 5-4, A-11
using label rest point, 4-23
commands, 7-19
Self-Strip, Enable or Disable, 7-7, 7-44
semicolon, command terminator, 6-18
semicolon, using in commands, 7-45
sensitivity, See media sensitivity number.
serial communications port connector, 1-8
serial port
changing default settings, 2-13
configuring, 2-12
using to connect a PC to the 4400, 2-6
Service menu, 3-7
Set Batch Count, 7-63
Set Control Panel Access Permission, 7-65
Set Dark Adjust, 7-65
Set End-of-Print Skip Distance, 7-65
Set Field Decrement, 7-64
Set Field Increment, 7-64
Set Inter-Character Delay, 7-63
Set Label Retract Distance, 7-65
Set Label Width, 7-65
Set Maximum Label Length, 7-65
Set Message Delay, 7-64
Set Number of Image Bands, 7-65
Set Postamble, 7-63
Set Preamble, 7-63
Set Print Speed, 7-65
Set Printhead Test Values, 7-65
Set Quantity Count, 7-63
Set Top of Form, 7-65
I-12
set warning,setting, 5-14
setting a security level, 8-3
setting maximum print speed, 8-12
setting the dark adjust, 4-20
setting the media alert, 5-14
setting the media sensitivity number, 4-16
shift print commands, 7-65
Silicon Software, ii
situating the printer, 2-4
six bits per byte graphics, 6-16
Skipping, 7-66
software drivers, 8-14
Source of Field Data, Define, 7-9
specifications
character sets, A-5
communications, A-5
dimensions, A-3
electrical requirements, A-3
environment, A-4
fonts, A-5
graphics, A-5
media, A-4
power usage, A-3
print speed, A-3
printhead, A-4
printing method, A-3
ribbon, A-4
speed, See print speed.
Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print, 7-4, 7-30
Static RAM Usage, Transmit, 7-5, 7-30
Status Dump, 7-5, 7-30, 7-63
Status Enquiry, 7-4, 7-8, 7-31, 7-63
status responses, 7-66
stop bits, 2-12
storing label formats, 6-22, 6-23
straight through DTE to DCE cable, 2-10
symbologies, See bar codes.
syntax errors, 9-12
system commands, 7-15
T
tables, downloading user-defined commands, 7-63
Takeup Reel Full, 7-66
tear bar, 1-6
cleaning, 10-7
technical support
Canadian phone number, ii
US phone number, ii
terminal emulation, using ASCII control characters, 6-8
terms used in this manual, xix
Test and Service mode commands, 7-19
descriptions, 7-79
Exit Test and Service, 7-79
Print Pitch Label, 7-79
Print Quality Label, 7-79
Index
Printhead Resistance Test, 7-79
Reset Printer Configuration, 7-79
summary, 7-11
Transmit 12 Volt Supply Value, 7-79
Transmit 24 Volt Supply Value, 7-79
Transmit Ambient Temperature, 7-79
Transmit Label Taken Sensor Value, 7-79
Transmit Paper Path Open Sensor Value, 7-79
Transmit Printhead Resistance Values, 7-79
Transmit Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, 7-79
Transmit Reflective Sensor Value, 7-79
Transmit Transmissive Sensor Value, 7-79
Test and Service Mode, Enter, 7-4, 7-31
Test and Service Mode, Exit, 7-11
thermal transfer media, setting the media sensitivity
number, 4-17, 4-19
thermal transfer ribbon
changing, 4-12
loading, 4-13
thermal transfer ribbon supply hub, 1-6
thermal transfer ribbon takeup hub, 1-6
Top of Form, Set, 7-6, 7-44
trademarks, ii
translation enabled, international character sets, A-15
Transmit 12 Volt Supply Value, 7-79
Transmit 24 Volt Supply Value, 7-79
Transmit Ambient Temperature, 7-79
Transmit Configuration Parameters, 7-64
Transmit Error Code, 7-8, 7-60, 7-63
Transmit Font, 7-64
Transmit Format, 7-64
Transmit Label and Gap Length, 7-64
Transmit Label Taken Sensor Value, 7-79
Transmit Options Selected, 7-64
Transmit Page, 7-64
Transmit Paper Path Open Sensor Value, 7-79
Transmit Printhead Parameters, 7-64
Transmit Printhead Resistance Values, 7-79
Transmit Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, 7-79
Transmit Quantity and Batch Count, 7-64
Transmit Reflective Sensor Value, 7-79
Transmit Software Version Number, 7-64
Transmit Static RAM Usage, 7-64
Transmit Transmissive Sensor Value, 7-79
Transmit User-Defined Characters, 7-64
Transmit User-Defined Command Tables, 7-64
transmitting commands, 7-18
troubleshooting, 9-3
TTR or Direct Thermal, Select, 7-6, 7-44
Twinax interface, A-12
Type of Graphic, Font or Bar Code, Select, 7-9
I
understanding error messages, 4-24
understanding label design components, 6-9
understanding the indicator lights, 3-4
units, 5-4
unpacking the printer, 1-3
UPC, A-7
UPC/EAN, 7-71
uploading formats, 6-4
User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit, 7-8, 7-61
User-Defined Character, Clear or Create, 7-8, 7-60
User-Defined Characters, Transmit, 7-5, 7-31
user-defined command tables, 7-63
user-defined configuration test label, 5-16
User-Defined Font Character, Clear or Create, 7-9
User-Defined Font Character, Create, 7-62
User-Defined Font, Clear or Define Bitmap, 7-61
user-defined fonts, 6-12
downloading, 6-13
User-Defined Tables, Transmit, 7-4, 7-32
using print tests, 9-14
using printer memory, 6-23
using PrintSet software, 6-5
using selective transfer, 8-8
using the control panel, 3-3
using the operator keys, 3-5
using the printer command set, 6-5
using the X and Y forms adjust, 4-21
V
verifying printer communications, 2-14
using DOS, 2-15
W
Warm Boot, 7-4, 7-32, 7-63
warning, setting, 5-15
warnings, xviii
warranty information, xvii
width
changing magnification, 6-19
configuring for labels, 5-12
of labels, 5-6
Width of Line, Box, Bar or Character, Define, 7-9, 7-62
word processor, using to create ASCII characters, 6-6
working with fields, 6-18
X
X and Y forms adjust, using, 4-21
Z
zero slash, 5-4
U
UCC-128, 7-71
UDC fields, editing commands, 7-14
I-13
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement